Sie sind auf Seite 1von 223

Product Description

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

Issue Date

01 2009-01-10

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: Email: http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 2 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

About This Document


Author
Prepared by Reviewed by Approved by Date Date Date

Summary
This document includes: Chapter 1 Network Application 2 Function Description Describes the OptiX OSN 7500 and its position in the network. This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX OSN 7500 in the terms of capacity, interface, boards, OAM and other functions. Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 7500. Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 7500. It includes intelligent software, board software, NE software and NM software. Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of function, application and protection. This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of service classes and application. Describes protection modes (including equipment level and network level) and characteristics supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.

3 Hardware

4 Software Architecture

5 Data Features

6 ASON Features

7 Protection

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 3 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

8 OAM

This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of maintenance and centralized management. This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of safe operation. This chapter describes the hardware dimension, interface specifications, transmission performance, environment requirements and power specification for the OptiX OSN 7500. This appendix lists the power consumption and weight of the boards that are configured on the OptiX OSN 7500. This appendix lists international standards to which the OptiX OSN 7500 conforms in terms of design and performance. This appendix lists the terms used in this document. The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.

9 Security Management 10 Technical Specifications

10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board 11 Compliant Standards

12 Glossary 13 Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 4 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

History
Issue Details Date Author Approved by

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 5 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Contents
1 Network Application......................................................................................................11 2 Function ........................................................................................................................ 14
2.1 Capacity .......................................................................................................................................... 14 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity ........................................................................................................ 14 2.1.2 Microwave Capacity ............................................................................................................... 15 2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity.............................................................................................................. 16 2.2 Service ............................................................................................................................................ 17 2.2.1 Service Type .......................................................................................................................... 17 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................ 18 2.3 Interface .......................................................................................................................................... 19 2.3.1 Service Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 20 2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces .................................................................................. 21 2.4 Networking Topology ...................................................................................................................... 21 2.5 Protection........................................................................................................................................ 23 2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection ................................................................................................... 24 2.5.2 Network Level Protection ....................................................................................................... 24 2.6 Board REG Function....................................................................................................................... 25 2.7 ASON Features............................................................................................................................... 27 2.8 Built-in WDM Technology................................................................................................................ 27 2.9 Microwave Technology ................................................................................................................... 28 2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 28 2.11 Clock ............................................................................................................................................. 29 2.12 High Precise Timing...................................................................................................................... 29 2.13 OAM Information Interworking ...................................................................................................... 30 2.14 OAM.............................................................................................................................................. 31 2.14.1 Software Package Loading .................................................................................................. 32 2.14.2 Hot Patch ............................................................................................................................. 33 2.14.3 NSF Function ....................................................................................................................... 33 2.14.4 Board Version Replacement ................................................................................................ 33 2.14.5 PRBS Function..................................................................................................................... 34 2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression............................................................................................ 34 2.14.7 TCM...................................................................................................................................... 35 2.14.8 ETH-OAM............................................................................................................................. 35 2.15 Security Management................................................................................................................... 36

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 6 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

3 Hardware....................................................................................................................... 37
3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 37 3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................ 39 3.3 Subrack........................................................................................................................................... 40 3.3.1 Structure................................................................................................................................. 41 3.3.2 Slot Allocation......................................................................................................................... 42 3.4 Boards............................................................................................................................................. 44 3.4.1 Classification of the Boards ................................................................................................... 44 3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards .......................................................................... 50 3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 51 3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 56 3.4.5 Data Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 57 3.4.6 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................... 61 3.4.7 Microwave Boards.................................................................................................................. 62 3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards ........................................................................................... 62 3.4.9 Other Boards.......................................................................................................................... 63

4 Software Architecture .................................................................................................. 65


4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 65 4.2 Communication Protocols............................................................................................................... 66 4.3 Board Software ............................................................................................................................... 66 4.4 NE Software.................................................................................................................................... 66 4.5 Network Management System........................................................................................................ 67 4.6 ASON Software............................................................................................................................... 68

5 Data Features................................................................................................................ 70
5.1 Ethernet Features ........................................................................................................................... 70 5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................ 70 5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 81 5.1.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................... 85 5.2 RPR Features ................................................................................................................................. 86 5.2.2 Functions................................................................................................................................ 88 5.2.3 Application.............................................................................................................................. 91 5.2.4 Protection ............................................................................................................................... 93 5.3 ATM Features.................................................................................................................................. 94 5.3.1 Functions................................................................................................................................ 94 5.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 97 5.3.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................. 100 5.4 DDN Features ............................................................................................................................... 100 5.4.1 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 101 5.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 101 5.4.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................. 102 5.5 SAN Features ............................................................................................................................... 103

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 7 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

6 ASON Features ........................................................................................................... 104


6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies ......................................................................................... 104 6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links........................................................................................... 104 6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links .................................................................................................. 106 6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration ................................................................................................ 106 6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration .............................................................................. 107 6.4 ASON Clock Tracing ..................................................................................................................... 108 6.5 SLA ............................................................................................................................................... 111 6.6 Diamond Services......................................................................................................................... 113 6.7 Gold Services ............................................................................................................................... 117 6.8 Silver Services .............................................................................................................................. 119 6.9 Copper Services ........................................................................................................................... 121 6.10 Iron Services ............................................................................................................................... 122 6.11 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................ 123 6.12 Service Association..................................................................................................................... 126 6.13 Service Optimization................................................................................................................... 127 6.14 Service Migration ........................................................................................................................ 127 6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................ 128 6.16 Preset Restoring Trail ................................................................................................................. 128 6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail ................................................................................................... 128 6.18 Shared Risk Link Group.............................................................................................................. 130 6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS ............................................................................................ 130

7 Protection ................................................................................................................... 132


7.1 Equipment Level Protection.......................................................................................................... 132 7.1.1 TPS Protection ..................................................................................................................... 133 7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units ................................................... 134 7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit ........................................................................................ 134 7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards ..................................................................................... 135 7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards ............................................................................................ 136 7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards ................................................................................... 137 7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit ...................................................................... 138 7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit ................................................................... 138 7.1.9 Intelligent Fans..................................................................................................................... 139 7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ........................................................... 139 7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions ................................................... 139 7.2 Network Level Protection.............................................................................................................. 140 7.2.1 Linear MSP .......................................................................................................................... 141 7.2.2 MSP Ring ............................................................................................................................. 141 7.2.3 SNCP ................................................................................................................................... 142 7.2.4 DNI ....................................................................................................................................... 146 7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection.................................................................................... 147

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 8 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description 7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP.................................................................................................... 147 7.2.7 RPR Protection .................................................................................................................... 149 7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection................................................................................................ 150

8 OAM............................................................................................................................. 152
8.1 Operation and Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 152 8.2 Network Management................................................................................................................... 154

9 Security Management ................................................................................................ 155


9.1 Authentication Management ......................................................................................................... 155 9.2 Authorization Management ........................................................................................................... 155 9.3 Network Security Management..................................................................................................... 156 9.4 System Security Management...................................................................................................... 156 9.5 Log Management.......................................................................................................................... 157 9.5.1 NE Security Log Management ............................................................................................. 157 9.5.2 Syslog Management ............................................................................................................ 157

10 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 159


10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment ..................................................................................... 159 10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet.............................................................................................. 160 10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack............................................................................................. 160 10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters ................................................................................................. 161 10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering ........................................................................................................... 161 10.1.5 Laser Safety Class ............................................................................................................. 162 10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance ......................................................................... 162 10.1.7 Transmission Performance ................................................................................................ 163 10.1.8 Protection Performance ..................................................................................................... 163 10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility............................................................................................ 165 10.1.10 Environmental Specification............................................................................................. 166 10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces ......................................................................... 167 10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 168 10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 168 10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 169 10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 171 10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 173 10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation........................................................................................................ 174 10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................ 175 10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 176 10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces...................................................................... 177 10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 178 10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces................................................................................................... 178 10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces ....................................................................... 179 10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications ............................................................................................ 179 10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications........................................................................................ 180

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 9 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description 10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications......................................................................................... 180 10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications......................................................................................... 180 10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications.......................................................................... 181 10.5 Microwave RF Performance ....................................................................................................... 181 10.5.1 Radio Work Modes............................................................................................................. 182 10.5.2 Frequency Band................................................................................................................. 183 10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity............................................................................................................ 184 10.5.4 Transceiver Performance................................................................................................... 186 10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance.................................................................................... 189 10.5.6 IF Performance .................................................................................................................. 190 10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem ................................................ 190 10.5.8 Equipment Reliability ......................................................................................................... 190 10.6 Safety Certification...................................................................................................................... 191 10.7 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................................... 192 10.7.1 Environment for Storage .................................................................................................... 192 10.7.2 Environment for Transportation.......................................................................................... 194 10.7.3 Environment for Operation................................................................................................. 197 10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ........................................................................ 199

11 Compliant Standards ............................................................................................... 203


11.1 ITU-T Recommendations ............................................................................................................ 203 11.2 IEEE Standards........................................................................................................................... 205 11.3 IETF Standards ........................................................................................................................... 206 11.4 ANSI Standards........................................................................................................................... 207 11.5 Environment Related Standards ................................................................................................. 207 11.6 EMC Standards ........................................................................................................................... 208 11.7 Safety Compliance Standards..................................................................................................... 208 11.8 Protection Standards................................................................................................................... 209 11.9 ASON Standards ......................................................................................................................... 209 11.10 Microwave Standards................................................................................................................ 210

12 Glossary.................................................................................................................... 213 13 Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................. 219

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 10 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Network Application

This chapter describes the position and application of the OptiX OSN 7500 intelligent optical switching system (the OptiX OSN 7500) in an optical transmission network. The OptiX OSN 7500 is the optical core switching (OCS) equipment. It is a next generation equipment that Huawei has developed based on the type of metropolitan area network (MAN) and its development trend in the future. As an intelligent optical core switching system with large capacity, the OptiX OSN 7500 is mainly used at the backbone layer of the MAN to groom and transmit various services with different granularities. The OptiX OSN 7500 has 360 Gbit/s higher order and 80 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capacities, and features large switching capacity. The OptiX OSN 7500 integrates the following technologies:
l l l l l l l l l

Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) Ethernet Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) Storage area network (SAN) Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) Digital data network (DDN) Automatically switched optical network (ASON) Microwave Technology

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 11 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500

As a system used at a higher layer, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be networked with the following equipment to provide a complete MAN solution:
l l l l l l l

OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 3500 II OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500

Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 7500 in a transmission network.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 12 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 7500


OptiX OSN 3500 II OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 7500 Backbone layer


OptiX OSN 3500 II OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

Convergence layer

OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 2500 Access layer

GSM/CDMA/ WCDMA/TDSCDMA

PSTN

Ethernet

...

ATM

SAN

Microwave Technology

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WDMA) Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN) Storage Area Network (SAN) Ethernet Microwave Technology

As an intelligent multiservice switching and transmission system, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be used as follows:
l l l

A core convergence node for a large city An optical core switching (OCS) system for a medium or small city A service grooming node on a provincial trunk

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 13 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

2
2.1 Capacity
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity 2.1.2 Microwave Capacity

Function

The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.

Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.

The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different. 2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards.

2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity


Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following cross-connect boards: T1GXCSA, T1EXCSA, T2UXCSA, T1SXCSA and T1IXCSA. Table 2-1 lists their cross-connect capacities. Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity Board Higher-Order Cross-Connect Capacity 240 Gbit/s (1536 x 1536 VC-4) 240 Gbit/s (1536 x 1536 VC-4) Lower-Order Cross-Connect Capacity Access Capacity of Single Subrack 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4) 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)

T1GXCSA

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4), equivalent to (8064 x 8064 VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3) 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4), equivalent to (16128 x 16128 VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3)

T1EXCSAa

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 14 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board

Higher-Order Cross-Connect Capacity 360 Gbit/s (2304 x 2304 VC-4) 360 Gbit/s (2304 x 2304 VC-4) 360 Gbit/s (2304 x 2304 VC-4)

Lower-Order Cross-Connect Capacity

Access Capacity of Single Subrack 280 Gbit/s (1792 x 1792 VC-4) 280 Gbit/s (1792 x 1792 VC-4) 280 Gbit/s (1792 x 1792 VC-4)

T2UXCSA

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4) equivalent to (8064 x 8064 VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3) 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) equivalent to (16128 x 16128 VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3) 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) equivalent to (3225632256 VC-12) or (15361536 VC-3)

T1SXCSA

T1IXCSA

a: The T1EXCSA board cannot be used with any line board of the N2 series (except the N2SLQ16). As the T2SL64 board is no longer manufactured, it can be replaced by the T2SL64A board, without affecting the services. It is recommended to use the T1EXCSA board with the T2SL64A board.

2.1.2 Microwave Capacity


The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different. Table 2-2 lists the maximum number of IF boards and the maximum number of microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 2-2 Microwave capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment Equipment Type OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500T(19inch) OptiX OSN 3500II OptiX OSN 7500 Maximum Number of Configured IF Boards 2 1 5 10 10 10 15 Maximum Supported Microwave Capacity (Channel) 4 2 10 20 20 20 30

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 15 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity


The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 22 service slots. The maximum access capacity varies according to the cross-connect and timing boards installed. Figure 2-1 shows the access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA is used. Figure 2-1 Access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA is used
S L O T 1 9 S L O T 2 0 S L O T 2 1 S L O T 2 2 S L O T 2 3 S L O T 2 4 S L O T 2 5 S L O T 2 6 S L O T 2 7 S L O T 2 8 S L O T 2 9 S L O T 3 0 S SLOT S 32 L L O O T T 3 3 1 4 SLOT 33 10 Gbit/s PIU(B) PIU(A) AUX S L O T 3 5 S L O T 3 6 S L O T 3 7 S L O T 3 8

GSCC(A)

GSCC(B)

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

Fiber routing FANA S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FANA S L O T 1 0 GXCSA(B) / EXCSA(B) S L O T 1 1 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 2 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 3 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 4 10 Gbit/s FANA S L O T 1 5 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 6 10 Gbit/s S S L L O O T T 1 1 7 8 5 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s

Fiber routing A : Active B : Standby

GXCSA(A) / EXCSA(A)

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

EOW

Fiber routing

Figure 2-2 shows the access capacity of service slots when the T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is used.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 16 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 2-2 Access capacity of service slots when the T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is used
S L O T 1 9 S L O T 2 0 S L O T 2 1 S L O T 2 2 S L O T 2 3 S L O T 2 4 S L O T 2 5 S L O T 2 6 S L O T 2 7 S L O T 2 8 S L O T 2 9 S L O T 3 0 S SLOT S 32 L L O O T T 3 3 1 4 SLOT 33 20 Gbit/s PIU(B) PIU(A) AUX S L O T 3 5 S L O T 3 6 S L O T 3 7 S L O T 3 8

GSCC(A)

GSCC(B)

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

Fiber routing FANA S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 UXCSA(A) /SXCSA(A)/ IXCSA(A) FANA S L O T 1 0 UXCSA(B) /SXCSA(B)/ IXCSA(B) S L O T 1 1 20 Gbit/s S L O T 1 2 20 Gbit/s S L O T 1 3 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 4 10 Gbit/s FANA S L O T 1 5 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 6 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 7 10 Gbit/s S L O T 1 8 10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

Fiber routing A : Active

20 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

EOW

Fiber routing

B : Standby

2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services. 2.2.1 Service Type The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services. 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.

2.2.1 Service Type


The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services. For details about supported service types, refer to Table 2-3.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 17 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 2-3 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 Service Type SDH services Description
l l

Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64 Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv (X8), VC3-Xv (X24) SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s E1/T1 service E3/T3 service E4 service

PDH services

l l l

NOTE With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing and demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.

Ethernet services

l l l l

Ethernet private line (EPL) service Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service EVPL service EVPLAN service Constant bit rate (CBR) service Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service Framed E1 service Fiber channel (FC) service Fiber connection (FICON) service Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service

RPR services

l l

ATM services

l l l l

DDN services

l l

SAN services

l l l l

2.2.2 Service Access Capacity


The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 2-4 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500 for accessing different services.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 18 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 2-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500 Service Type STM-64 standard or concatenated service STM-64 (FEC) service STM-16 standard or concatenated service STM-16 (FEC) service STM-4 standard or concatenated service STM-1 standard service STM-1 (electrical) service E4 service E3/T3 service E1/T1 service N x 64 kbit/s service (N: 131) Framed E1 service FE service GE service 10GE service STM-1 ATM service STM-4 ATM service ESCON service FICON/FC100 service FC200 service DVB-ASI service Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack 28 17 112 22 88 280 66 16 102 252 32 32 208 88 44 88 22 88 44 22 88

2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces. 2.3.1 Service Interfaces Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 19 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.3.1 Service Interfaces


Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces. Table 2-5 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 2-5 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Interface SDH service interface Description STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz, and can output fixed wavelength and can be directly interconnected with the WDM equipment. PDH service interface 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors Ethernet service interface DDN service interface ATM service interface 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR Framed E1 RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3 or N1PL3 or N1PL3A board IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1 or N1PQM or N1PQMA or N2PQ1 board Storage area network (SAN) service interface FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 20 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical specifications defined by Huawei.

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces


The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces. Table 2-6 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 2-6 Administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 7500 Interface Type Administration interface Description One remote maintenance interface (OAM) Four broadcast data interfaces (S1S4) One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1) One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management (ETH) One administration serial interface (F&f) One commissioning interface (COM) Orderwire interface One orderwire phone interface (PHONE) Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2) Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two broadcast data interfaces) Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) External synchronization and synchronous output Alarm interface 16-input and 4-output alarm interface Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces Four cabinet alarm concatenation input interface Microwave IF interface One coaxial cable connects to one ODU. Each board provides two cables to separately connect two ODUs. Two -48 VDC power input interfaces.

2.4 Networking Topology


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 level.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 21 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of NEs:
l l l

Terminal multiplexer (TM) Add/drop multiplexer (ADM) Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)

The OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
l

The OptiX OSN 7500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer. Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with the WDM equipment. Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.

l l

Table 2-7 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 2-7 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 7500 Networking Mode 1 Chain Topology

Ring

Tangent rings

Intersecting rings

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 22 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Networking Mode 5 Ring with chain

Topology

DNI

Hub

Mesh

Legends:

MADM

ADM

TM

ASON NE

2.5 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection. 2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 23 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

2.5.2 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes.

2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. Table 2-8 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 2-8 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 Item PDH DDN Ethernet processing unit ATM Protection for the Microwave unit Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit Cross-connect and timing unit SCC unit power interface unit Intelligent Fans unit Board Under Abnormal Conditions Protection Scheme TPS TPS TPS/PPS/BPS/DLAG/1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup 1+1 HSB/FD/SD and N+1 hot backup Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective receiving) and inter-board protection (N+1 protection) 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup The power supply modules are of mutual backup for the three fan modules. Power-Down Protection During Software Loading, Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply and Board Temperature Detection

NOTE The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the coexistence of two different types of TPS protection groups.

2.5.2 Network Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes. Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 24 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 Network Level Protection SDH protection Protection Scheme Linear MSP MSP ring Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP) Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection Fiber-shared virtual trail protection Optical-path-shared MSP Ethernet protection ATM protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

2.6 Board REG Function


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM. See Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Hybrid application of ADM and REG
REG SL64 OUT IN SL64 OU T SL64 IN

IN

OU T

IN SL64

OUT

OptiX OSN 7500 IN OUT OUT IN

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

SL16

SL16

SL16

SL16

ADM

For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-10.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 25 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 2-10 Boards that supports the REG Board Valid Slots When the Cross-Connect Capacity Is 240 Gbit/s Slots 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31 Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31 Slots 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31 Slots 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31 slot 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31 Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31 Valid Slots When the Cross-Connect Capacity is 360 Gbit/s Slots 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31 Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31 Slots 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31 Slots 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31 slot 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31 Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31 With the REG function enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead, the frame header and FEC overhead. Function

T2SL64, T2SL64A N1SL64 N2SL16, N3SL16 N2SL16A N3SLN N1SF64, N1SF64A

With the REG function enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead and the frame header.

NOTE If the line boards are the N3SLN series, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function only when N is 16.

For the optical interfaces for the REG, see Table 2-11. Table 2-11 Optical interfaces for the REG Board T2SL64, T2SL64A N1SL64 N1SF64 N1SF64A N2SL16, N3SL16 N2SL16A N3SLN Optical Interface Type I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 26 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

2.7 ASON Features


The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources. The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 7500 are as follows:
l l l l l l l

Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration. Supports service level agreement (SLA). Supports mesh networking and protection. Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide and improve the bandwidth availability. Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and pre-configuration. Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the scalability of the network. Provides ASON clock tracing.
The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 7500 according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX OSN 7500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.

2.8 Built-in WDM Technology


The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment are as follows:
l l

Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped. The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped. The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are transparently transmitted. Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized. The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored. Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 27 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l

Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms. Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed. Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a long distance. Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.

l l l

2.9 Microwave Technology


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate frequency. It can work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve wireless service transmission. In the case of the OptiX OSN 7500, the service signals are transmitted on the basis of the microwave transmission flow shown in Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 Processing flow of the service signals
Baseband signal PDH/SDH/Ethernet Service interface board Cross connect board Baseband signal Microwave IF board IF signal ODU Antenna RF signal

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following microwave functions:


l l

Software programmed radio (SPR) function. The microwave capacity and modulation mode can be set through software. Microwave frames based on TU and STM-1. The air interface is used for the product to interconnect with the other OptiX OSN products that adopt the microwave frames based on TU and STM-1 or to interconnect with the OptiX RTN 600. 1+1 protection and N+1 protection. Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.

l l

2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply


The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC power supply is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power. The OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an uninterrupted power modules (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into 48 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500. A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 28 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The dimensions of the power box are 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 130 mm (H).

2.11 Clock
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the clock functions.
l l l l l l l

SSM clock protocol Tributary retiming Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input External clock output shutdown Line clock source Tributary clock source Three working modes are as follows:

Tracing mode Holdover mode Free-run mode

ASON clock tracing

For the detailed information of the relevant clock, see the clock topic in the Feature Description.

2.12 High Precise Timing


To meet the requirement of precise time synchronization between equipment, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts the precise time synchronization technology. The time information is accessed in the SDH network and transmitted to the equipment (such as the 3G wireless base station) that requires precise time. The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts the precise time synchronization technology that meets the requirements in IEEE 1588 standard. The system control and communication board (N3GSCC) and the cross-connect board (T1IXCSA) are used to replace the GPS. The time information is accessed through the S1 and S2 interfaces on the T1EOW board and is carried by the line board to synchronize the time in the global network.

The high precise timing function can be enabled only when the working and protection cross-connect and SCC boards are upgraded and support the high precise timing function of an NE. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following line boards that support the time synchronization function.
l l

10 Gbit/s rate: N1SL64 and N1SLD64. 2.5 Gbit/s rate: N3SL16A, N1SLD16 and N1SLQ16.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 29 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l

155 Mbit/s rate: N1SL1A and N1SLQ1A.

The OptiX OSN 7500 contains the data processing board (namely, the N5EFS0 board) that supports the time synchronization function.
The N5EFS0 boards supports the time synchronization function only when it works with the N1EFF8A and N1ETF8A access boards.

2.13 OAM Information Interworking


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports OAM information interworking. Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 7500 to transparently transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 7500.
l l l

HWECC IP over DCC OSI over DCC

Table 2-12 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 2-12 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 7500 DCC Allocation Channel type Operation mode Mode 1 Mode 2 N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC Supports the D1D1, D1D3 and D4D12 channel types. Supports 160 D1D3 channels. Supports 40 D1D3 channels. Supports 40 D4D12 channels. Mode 3 Supports 26 D1D3 channels. Supports 26 D4D12 channels. Mode 4 Supports 12 D1D3 channels. Supports 12 D4D12 channels. Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Supports 8 D1D3 channels. Supports 10 D1D3 channels. Supports 70 D1D3 channels. Supports 30 D4D12 channels. Mode 8 Supports 100 D1D3 channels. Supports 20 D4D12 channels. Mode 9 Supports 30 D1D1 channels. Supports 150 D1D3 channels.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 30 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

DCC Allocation Mode 10

N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC Supports 30 D1D1 channels. Supports 39 D1D3 channels. Supports 37 D4D12 channels.

Protocol type Default mode

Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols. Mode 1

2.14 OAM
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides maintenance and management functions.The OAM of the network can be realized by using the T2000. This topic describes the key equipment-level OAM solutions. 2.14.1 Software Package Loading The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and simulation software package loading. 2.14.2 Hot Patch The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology. 2.14.3 NSF Function The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software. 2.14.4 Board Version Replacement The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board. 2.14.5 PRBS Function The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function. 2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board. 2.14.7 TCM The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section. 2.14.8 ETH-OAM

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 31 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.

2.14.1 Software Package Loading


The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and simulation software package loading.

Software Package Loading


The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the usability of the upgrade operations. The software package loading has the following features:
l l

Users load the software in a uniform operation interface. The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board. If the board software files are lost, these files can be restored from the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board. The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the software version of the in-service board does not match the software package, the board software is automatically updated. The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load the files required in the current update. The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with the same series of SCC boards. The NG-SDH equipment supports the anti-mistake package loading function.

l l

The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:


l l l l l l

Upgrade of the NE software Replacement of the service boards Replacement of the auxiliary boards Replacement of the cross-connect boards Replacement of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards Replacement of the CF cards of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards

Simulation Package Loading


If a software package needs to be loaded to an NE and if the mapping relation between the NE boards and the software is specified according to the simulation package, you can enable the simulation package loading function to increase the loading efficiency. The simulation software package includes:
l l

All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each software

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 32 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The simulation software package loading has the following features:


l l l

Simplifying the upgrade operation Improving the upgrade security Improving the upgrade efficiency

2.14.2 Hot Patch


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology. Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch. The hot patch technology has the following features:
l l l

The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services. The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents frequent software version upgrade. The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks. The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the efficiency of solving problems.

2.14.3 NSF Function


The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software. In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the carrier-class requirements.

If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms, and this ensures only a low service interruption time.

2.14.4 Board Version Replacement


The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 33 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the equipment cost and the maintenance cost. For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to Part Replacement Design. When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
l

The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, If the T2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board. The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.

2.14.5 PRBS Function


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function. The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network. During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device. The PRBS function has the following two types:
l l

If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a tributary board. If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.

The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:


l l l l l l

For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback command on the T2000. On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path. The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts the statistics. The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result. The user queries the PRBS statistics result. The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.

For details, refer to PRBS.

2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board. When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board, many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 34 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem. If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE, and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data board are suppressed. If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.

2.14.7 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section. The N2SL1, N2SLQ1, N2SLO1, N3SLO1, N2SL4, N3SLN, N3SLD41, N3SLQ41, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N3SLT1, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SLQ16, N2SL16A and T2SL64A boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.

2.14.8 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate network faults, and so on. For the OptiX OSN 7500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate faults. The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
l l l l

The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point. The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check. The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check. OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.

The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
l l l l l l

Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol. Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance of the link. Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end. Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance. Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port. Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 35 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

2.15 Security Management


The T2000 uses many schemes to ensure the security of the OptiX OSN 7500 NE.
l l l l l

Authentication management Authorization Management Network Security Management System Security Management Log Management

For the details of security management, refer to the Security Management.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 36 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

3
3.1 Overview

Hardware

The OptiX OSN 7500 consists of the cabinet, subrack, and boards. Figure 3-1 shows the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack installed in an ETSI cabinet.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 37 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 equipment


1

3 5

7 H D W

1. DC PDU 5. Subrack

2. Side panel 6. fiber management tray

3. Cable distribution plate 7. Front door

4. Orderwire phone fixing frame

The OptiX OSN 7500 uses various types of boards and thus forms the system frame where the cross-connect matrix is the core. The system frame of the OptiX OSN 7500 has the following units:
l l l l

SDH interface unit PDH interface unit DDN interface unit Data (Ethernet/ATM/SAN/Video) processing unit

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 38 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l l l l l l l l

WDM processing unit SDH cross-connect matrix unit Synchronous timing unit SCC unit Overhead processing unit Power interface unit Auxiliary interface unit Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit

Figure 3-2 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 7500. Figure 3-2 System architecture

SDH/PDH/Ethernet/ ATM/DDN interface board

SDH interface

signal

unit

STM-N optical

Cross-connect matrix

PDH signal SDH signal Ethernet signal ATM signal DDN signal

Synchronous timing unit

Interface unit

processing

Overhead

Auxiliary

3.2 Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 7500. A power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access 48 V or 60 V power. Figure 3-3 shows the outer view of an ETSI cabinet.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

SCC unit

unit

Page 39 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 3-3 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet

T63E cabinet

N63E cabinet

3.3 Subrack
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 3.3.1 Structure

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 40 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area. 3.3.2 Slot Allocation The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the lower layer has 18 slots.

3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area. Figure 3-8 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack Figure 3-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack

Upper layer processing board area

Fiber routing area

Interface board area

Fan area

Fiber routing area

Lower layer processing board area

H W D

The functions of the areas are as follows:


l l l l

Upper layer processing board area and lower layer processing board area: These areas house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500. Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 7500. Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the equipment. Fiber routing area: This area houses the fiber jumpers in the subrack.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 41 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The interface board is also called the access board or transit board. The interface board provides physical interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical signals or electrical signals to the corresponding processing board.

3.3.2 Slot Allocation


The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the lower layer has 18 slots. Figure 3-9 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack. Figure 3-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
S L S LS LS L L OL OL O T O T O TO T T 1 T 1T 1 4 2 52 62 9 0 1 2 LS O L TO 1T 72 S L O T 2 3 4 5 S GSCC(A) GSCC(B) C L S O L T O 1 T 8 2 S L O T 2 6 S L O T 2 7 S L O T 2 8 S L O T 2 9 S L O T 3 0 S SLOT S L L 32 O O T T 3 3 1 4 SLOT 33 PIU(B) AUX PIU(A) S L O T 3 5 S L O T 3 6 S L O T 3 7 S L O T 3 8

S EOW C

Fiber SLOT 39 S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 FAN S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7

routing FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 SLOT 41 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5 FAN S L O T 1 6 S L O T 1 7 S L O T 1 8

SLOT 40 S L O T 8 S L O T 9

XCS(A)

XCS(B)

Fiber

routing (B): S tandby

Fiber

routing

(A): Active

Slot Area for Interface Boards


l l l

Slots for the service interface boards: slots 1922 and 3538. Slot for the orderwire interface board: slot 23. Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 34.

Slot Area for Processing Boards


l l l

Slots for the service processing boards: slots 18, 1118 and 2631. Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 910. Slots for the PIU boards: slots 3233.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 42 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l

Slots for the system control and communication (SCC) boards: slots 2425.

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards. Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards Slots for Processing Boards Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 1920 Slots 2122 Slots 3536 Slots 3738

Paired Slots
If the overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are paired slots. When an NE is configured with an orderwire phone or realizes the service protection in DPS mode, the two boards that form a ring must be inserted in the paired slots. Table 3-3 lists the paired slots. Table 3-2 Paired slots Slot Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 26 Slot 28 Slot 30 Paired Slot Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 27 Slot 29 Slot 31

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 43 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

3.4 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards. 3.4.1 Classification of the Boards The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards, and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards. 3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards. 3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards. 3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards. 3.4.5 Data Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards. 3.4.6 WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards. 3.4.7 Microwave Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards. 3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards. 3.4.9 Other Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.

3.4.1 Classification of the Boards


The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards, and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards.

SDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1 rates. Table 3-4 lists the SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-3 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board N1SL64 Description 1xSTM-64 optical interface board Board N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, and N1SLQ4A Description 4xSTM-4 optical interface board

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 44 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board T2SL64

Description 1xSTM-64 optical interface board 1xSTM-64 optical interface board 1xSTM-64 optical interface board (with the forward error correction (FEC) function) 2xSTM-64 optical interface board 1xSTM-16 optical interface board 1xSTM-16 optical interface board

Board N1SLD4, N2SLD4, and N1SLD4A N1SLT1 and N3SLT1 N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, and N1SLQ1A

Description 2xSTM-4 optical interface board 12xSTM-1 optical interface board 4xSTM-1 optical interface board

T2SL64A N1SF64 and N1SF64A

N1SLD64 N1SL16, N2SL16, and N3SL16 N1SL16A, N2SL16A, and N3SL16A

N1SL1, N2SL1, and N1SL1A N1SLH1 and N1SLH1A N1SEP1

1xSTM-1 optical interface board 16xSTM-1 signal processing board 2xSTM-1 line processing board when the interfaces are available on the front panel 8xSTM-1 line processing board when the interfaces are available on the corresponding interface board

N1SLQ16 and N2SLQ16 N1SF16

4xSTM-16 optical interface board 1xSTM-16 optical interface board (with the out-band FEC function) 8xSTM-16 optical interface board 1xSTM-4 optical interface board

N2SLO1 and N3SLO1 N3SLN

8xSTM-1 optical interface board 1xSTM-16/STM-4/S TM-1 optical interface board 2xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board 4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board

N1SLO16

N3SLD41

N1SL4, N2SL4, and N1SL4A

N3SLQ41

PDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and have different impedances.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 45 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 3-5 lists the PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-4 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 N1PQM and N1PQMA N1PL3 and N2PL3 N1PL3A and N2PL3A Description 63xE1 service processing board 63xE1/T1 service processing board 3xE3/T3 service processing board 3xE3/T3 service processing board (The interfaces are available on the front panel.) 4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board Board N1PD3 and N2PD3 N2PQ3 N1DX1 N1DXA Description 6xE3/T3 service processing board 12xE3/T3 service processing board DDN service accessing and converging board DDN service converging and processing board

N2SPQ4

Data Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the data boards that provide the transparent transmission function, switching function, or RPR function. Table 3-6 lists the data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-5 Data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board N1EFT8 Description 8xFE or 16xFE transparent transmission board 8xFE transparent transmission board 2xGE transparent transmission board Board N1EMS4 Description 4xGE and 16xFE transparent transmission and converging board 2xGE and 16xFE transparent transmission and converging board 4xGE switching and processing board

N1EFT8A

N1EMS2

N1EGT2 and N2EGT2 N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 N1EFS0A

N1EGS4, N3EGS4, and N4EGS4 N2EGR2

8xFE switching and processing board

2xGE ring processing board

16xFE switching and processing board

N2EMR0

12xFE and 1xGE ring processing board

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 46 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board N1EFS4, N2EFS4, and N3EFS4 N2EGS2 and N3EGS2 N1MST4

Description 4xFE switching and processing board

Board N1ADL4

Description 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board

2xGE switching and processing board 4-port multi-service transparent transmission board 2-port 10xGE Layer 2 switching and processing board

N1ADQ1

4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board 4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board

N1IDL4

N1EAS2

N1IDQ1

Interface Boards and Switching and Bridging Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports optical interface boards, electrical interface boards, and switching and bridging boards. Table 3-7 lists the interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-6 Interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board N1EU08 N1OU08 N2OU08 Description 8xSTM-1 electrical interface board 8xSTM-1 optical interface board (LC) 8xSTM-1 optical interface board (SC) 32xE1 switching access board (75 ohms) 4xE4/STM-1 electrical interface board 6xE3/T3 switching access board Board N1D12S N1D12B N1EFF8 and N1EFF8A N1ETF8 and N1ETF8A N1ETS8 Description 32xE1/T1 switching access board (120 ohms) 32xE1/T1 access board (120 ohms) 8x100M Ethernet optical interface board 8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board 8x10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching board DDN service interface board

N1D75S

N1MU04

N1D34S

N1DM12

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 47 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board N1C34S

Description 3xE3/T3 switching access board

Board N1TSB8

Description 8-channel electrical interface protection switching board

Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple system control boards and cross-connect boards that have different cross-connect capacities. Table 3-8 lists the cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-7 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board T1GXCSA Description General cross-connect and synchronous timing board Enhanced cross-connect and synchronous timing board Ultra cross-connect and synchronous timing board Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board Board T2SXCSA Description Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board Infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board Intelligent system control and communication board -

T1EXCSAa

T1IXCSA

T2UXCSA

N2GSCC, N3GSCC, N4GSCC, and N5GSCC -

T1SXCSA

a: The T1EXCSA cannot work with the line boards of series N2 (except for the N2SLQ16). The T2SL64 is not delivered any longer and can be replaced with the T2SL64A. It is recommended that you use the T2SL64A with the T1EXCSA.

Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface board and fan board. Table 3-9 lists the auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 48 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 3-8 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board T1EOW T1AUX N1FANA Description Orderwire processing board System auxiliary interface board Fan board (high power)

WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM boards such as the optical add/drop multiplexing board and optical amplifier board. Table 3-10 lists the WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-9 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board TN11CMR2 Description 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Board N1MR2C Description 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board Optical booster amplifier board Filter isolating board

TN11CMR4

N1LWX

TN11MR2

TN11OBU1

TN11MR4

N1FIB

N1MR2A

Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports microwave boards such as the microwave IF board and microwave power board. Table 3-11 lists the microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-10 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board N1IFSD1 Description Dual-port IF board

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 49 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board N1RPWR

Description 6-channel ODU power board

Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards. Table 3-12 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-11 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board N1BPA and N2BPA N1BA2 Description Optical booster and pre-amplifier board Optical booster amplifier board Forward Raman driving board (external) Board N1COA, 61COA, and 62COA N1DCU and N2DCU Description Case-shaped optical amplifier Dispersion compensation board Backward Raman driving board (external)

N1RPC01

N1RPC02

Power Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports power boards such as the UPM and power interface board. Table 3-13 lists the power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports. Table 3-12 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports Board UPM T1PIU Description Uninterruptible power module Power interface board

3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards. Table 3-14 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 50 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 3-13 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500 Board T1GXCSA T1EXCSA T2UXCSA T1SXCSA T1IXCSA N2GSCC, N3GSCC, N4GSCC, N5GSCC Full Name General cross-connect and synchronous timing board Enhanced cross-connect and synchronous timing board Ultra cross-connect and synchronous timing board Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board Infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board System control and communication board Valid Slots Slots 9 and 10 Slots 9 and 10 Slots 9 and 10 Slots 9 and 10 Slots 9 and 10 Slots 24 and 25

3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards. Table 3-15 lists the SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-14 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500 Board T2SL64, T2SL64A Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38, 1116 and 2631 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interface Type I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b Connector LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 51 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board N1SLD64

Valid Slots If the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable. Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 78, 1112 and 3031

Interfacing Mode

Interface Type

Connector LC

Interfaces I-64.1, S-64.2b available on the front panel

N1SL64

Slots 48, 1116 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel

I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d

LC

N1SF64

Slots 48, 1116 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel

LC

N1SF64A

Slots 48, 1116 and 2631

LC

N1SF16

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38, 1116 and 2631 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631

LC

N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38, 1116 and 2631 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel

L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

LC

N1SLD16

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

LC

N1SLO16

If the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable. Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 78, 1112 and 3031

LC

N1SL16A , N2SL16A

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38, 1116 and 2631 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 52 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board N1SLQ16 , N2SLQ16

Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 1718 (for the board housed in any of slots 12 and 1718, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (for the board housed in any of slots 38, 1116 and 2631, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (for the board housed in any of slots 18, 1118 and 2631, four optical interfaces can be configured)

Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel

Interface Type I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

Connector LC

N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4 A, N2SLQ4

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 1718 (for the board housed in any of slots 12 and 1718, two optical interfaces can be configured), or slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (for the board housed in any of slots 38, 1116 and 2631, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (for the board housed in any of slots 18, 1118 and 2631, four optical interfaces can be configured)

Interfaces available on the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

LC

N3SLD41 , N3SLQ41

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel

I-1/I-4, S-1.1/S-4.1, L-1.1/L-4.1, L-1.2/L-4.2, Le-1.2/Le-4.2 I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

LC

N1SLD4, N1SLD4A , N2SLD4 N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel

LC

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 53 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board N3SLN

Valid Slots Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel

Interface Type I-1/I-4, S-1.1/S-4.1, L-1.1/L-4.1, L-1.2/L-4.2, Le-1.2/Le-4.2, I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, Le-16.2 I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

Connector LC

N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1 A N2SLQ1

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel

LC

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

LC

N1SLH1, N1SLH1A
a

Slots 23 and 1718

S-1.1 optical Interfaces available on the interface 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1OU08 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N2OU08 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU08 S-1.1 optical interface

LC

SC

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface

SMB

N2SLO1

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel

I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

LC

N3SLO1

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 54 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board N1SLT1

Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 1718 (for the board housed in any of slots 12 and 1718, eight optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (for the board housed in any of slots 38, 1116 and 2631, 12 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (for the board housed in any of slots 18, 1118 and 2631, 12 optical interfaces can be configured)

Interfacing Mode

Interface Type

Connector LC

Interfaces S-1.1 available on the front panel

N3SLT1

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18 , 1118 and 2631 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18 , 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel

S-1.1

LC

N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1 N1SEP1a

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631

Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1OU08 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N2OU08 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU08

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1

LC

Slots 23 and 1718

LC

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1

SC

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface

SMB

N1SEP1b

Slots 13 and 1718

Interfaces available on the front panel

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface

SMB

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 55 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board

Valid Slots

Interfacing Mode

Interface Type

Connector

a: The N1SLH1, N1SLH1A and N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 board to realize the TPS protection. b: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.

3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards. Table 3-16 lists the PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-16 lists the PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-15 PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500 Board N2SPQ4 N1PD3a, N2PD3 N1PL3a, N2PL3 N1PL3A, N2PL3A N2PQ3 Valid Slot Slots 23 and 1718 Slot 23 and 1718 Slot 23 and 1718 Slot 18, 1118 and 2631 Slot 23 and 1718 Slot 13 and 1718 Slot 13 and 1718 Slot 13 and 1718 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 4-port electrical interface board N1MU04 Interfaces available on the 6-port electrical interface switching board N1D34S Interfaces available on the 3-port electrical interface switching board N1C34S Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 6-port electrical interface switching board N1D34S Interfaces available on the 32-port electrical interface switching board N1D75S Interfaces available on the 32-port electrical interface switching board N1D12S Interfaces available on the 32-port electrical interface switching board N1D12S and N1D12B Interfaces available on the N x 64 Interface Type 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E1 interface Connector SMB SMB

SMB

SMB

SMB

N1PQ1A, N2PQ1A N1PQ1B, N2PQ1B N1PQM, N1PQMA

DB44

120-ohm E1 interface 120-ohm E1 interface and 100-ohm T1 interface RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35,

DB44

DB44

N1DX1

Slots 13 and

DB28,

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 56 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board

Valid Slot 1718

Interfacing Mode kbit/s interface board N1DM12

Interface Type V.24, X.21, Framed E1

Connector DB44

a: The N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3, and N2PQ3 boards can work with the N1TSB8 board to realize the TPS protection.

Table 3-16 PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500 Board N1DXA N1DM12 N1TSB8 N1MU04 N1D75S N1D12S N1D12B N1C34S N1D34S Valid Slot Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Slots 1922 and 3538 Slots 37 and 38 Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37 Slots 1922 and 3538 Slots 1922 and 3538 Slots 1922 and 3538 Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37 Slots 1922 and 3538

3.4.5 Data Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards. Table 3-18 lists the data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-19 lists the data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-17 Data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500 Valid Slot Board N2EGS2 Interfacing Mode Valid slots when the cross-connect Interfaces available on capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) N3EGS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18, Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ LC Interface Type 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX Connector LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 57 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Valid Slot Board 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) N1EFS0A Slots 23 and 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8 N2EFS0, N4EFS0a Slots 23 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8 N5EFS0 Slots 23 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8A Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8A N1EFS4 N3EFS4 N1EGT2 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (622 Mbit/s) Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfacing Mode

Interface Type ZX

Connector

10/100BA SE-TX

RJ-45

100BASE -FX

LC

10/100BA SE-TX

RJ-45

100BASE -FX

LC

10/100BA SE-TX

RJ-45

100BASE -FX

LC

10/100BA SE-TX 10/100BA SE-TX 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX

RJ-45 RJ-45 LC

Valid slots when the cross-connect Interfaces available on capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N2EGT2

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect

Interfaces available on the front panel

1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX

LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 58 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Valid Slot Board capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) N1EFT8b Slots 13 and 1718 (622 Mbit/s) Slots 23 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8 N1EFT8A N2EMR0 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 2 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfacing Mode

Interface Type

Connector

10/100BA SE-TX 10/100BA SE-TX, 100BASE -FX 10/100BA SE-TX, 100BASE -FX 10/100BA SE-TX 10/100BA SE-TX, 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100BA SE-TX, 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100BA SE-TX, 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX

RJ-45 RJ-45

LC

RJ-45 RJ-45

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 23 and Interfaces available on 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s) the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8 Interfaces available on Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 13 and 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s) N2EGR2 Valid slots when the cross-connect Interfaces available on capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) N1EMS4 Valid slots when the cross-connect Interfaces available on capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 13 and

LC

RJ-45, LC

1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX

LC

1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX

LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 59 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Valid Slot Board 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 2 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 23 and 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8 Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfacing Mode

Interface Type

Connector

10/100BA SE-TX, 100BASE -FX, 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100BA SE-TX, 100BASE -FX, 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX

RJ-45

LC

N1EMS2

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Interfaces available on the front panel

LC

Valid slots when the cross-connect Interfaces available on capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 23 and the 8-port Ethernet 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s) twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 23 and 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8

10/100BA SE-TX, 100BASE -FX, 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100BA SE-TX, 100BASE -FX, 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX 1000BAS E-SX/LX/ ZX

RJ-45

LC

N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4

Valid slots when the cross-connect Interfaces available on capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)

LC

N1EAS2

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (10 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect

Interfaces available on the front panel

10GBAS E-LW/LR

LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 60 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Valid Slot Board capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (10 Gbit/s) N1ADL4 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25 Gbit/s) Interfaces available on the front panel Interfacing Mode

Interface Type

Connector

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 X3.296/( DVB-ASI) EN50083 -9, 200-M5-S N-I, 200-SM-L C-I

LC

N1ADQ1

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Interfaces available on the front panel

LC

N1IDL4

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Interfaces available on the front panel

LC

N1IDQ1

Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Interfaces available on the front panel

LC

N1MST4

Interfaces available on Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)

LC

a: The N2EFS0, N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 can be used with the N1ETS8 to realize the TPS protection. b: The N1EFT8 provides eight FE electrical interfaces on the front panel. The N1EFT8 can be used with the N1ETF8 to process 16-port FE electrical signals. The N1EFT8 can be used with the N1EFF8 to process eight FE electrical signals and eight FE optical signals. Table 3-18 Data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500 Board N1ETF8, N1ETF8A N1EFF8, N1EFF8A Valid Slot Slots 1922 and 3538 Slots 1922 and 3538

3.4.6 WDM Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 61 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 3-20 lists the WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-19 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500 Board N1MR2A N1MR2C N1LWX TN11MR2 TN11MR4 TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4 Valid Slots Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Slots 1922 and 3538 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Connector LC LC LC LC LC LC LC

3.4.7 Microwave Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards. Table 3-21 list the WDM boards, their valid and their interface slots for the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-20 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 7500 Board N1IFSD1 N1RPWR Valid Slot Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Connector IF Power supply interface

3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards. Table 3-22 lists the optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 62 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 3-21 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500 Board N1BA2 N1BPA, N2BPA N1DCU, N2DCU 61COA, N1COAa 62COAa ROPa N1RPC0 1 N1RPC0 2 Valid Slots Interfacing Mode Connector LC LC LC SC SC, E2000 LC LSH/APC, LC/PC LSH/APC, LC/PC

Slots 18, 1118 and Interfaces available on the 2631 front panel Slots 18, 1118 and Interfaces available on the 2631 front panel Slots 18, 1118 and Interfaces available on the 2631 front panel Slots 101 and 102 Slots 101 and 102 Slot 103 Slot 104 Slot 105 Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel

a: The slots for the COA and ROP displayed on the T2000 are logical slots and not physical slots.

3.4.9 Other Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards. Table 3-23 lists the mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 3-22 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 Board T1AUX T1EOW T1PIU N1FANA UPMa Valid Slots Slot 34 Slot 23 Slots 32 and 33 Slots 3941 Slot 50 Connector SMB, RJ-45 SMB, RJ-45 Power supply interface -

a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot 50.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 63 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 64 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

4
4.1 Overview

Software Architecture

The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works with other modules. The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software and NM system. The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer. Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs specific functions and provides service for the upper layer. The system software architecture is shown in Figure 4-1. In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and "Board Software". The ASON software is also contained in the NE software. Figure 4-1 Software architecture
Network Management System

NE software ASON software High Level Communication Module Real-time multi-task operating system Network side Module Equipment Management Module Communication Module Database Management Module

Board Software

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 65 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

4.2 Communication Protocols


Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812. Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE (NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN). At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) are provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface. According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on the basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack. In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial line internet protocol (SLIP).

4.3 Board Software


The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software through performance events and alarm. The specific functions include:
l l l l

Alarm management Performance management Configuration management Communication management

It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-T compliant specific functions of the NE.

4.4 NE Software
The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards, so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE. According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and OS function at network unit layer. Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE and other equipment (including NM and other NEs).
l l

Real-time multi-task operating system The NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to manage public resources and support application programs.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 66 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l

It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application program execution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware. Communication module The communication module is the interface module between NE software and board software. According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software and the board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the equipment. Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from the NE software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and performance events of the board are reported to the NE software. Network Side (NS) Module The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer. Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:

l l l

l l

Qx interface module Command line interface module Security management module

l l l l

Equipment management module The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE management. It includes administrator and agent. Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events. Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implement the operations of the managed object, and send up events according to the change of status of the managed object. High-level communication module The high-level communication module exchanges management information among NEs and between the NM system and the NE. It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and ECC communication module. Database management module The database management module is a part of the NE software. It includes two independent parts: data and program. The data are organized in the form of database, including network database, alarm database, performance database and equipment database. The program manages and accesses the data in the database.

l l l l l l l l

4.5 Network Management System


The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 67 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standard management information model as well as object-oriented management technology. It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor and manage the network equipment. The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmission network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment. The management functions of the NM software include:
l

Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, and counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault diagnosis. Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and prints performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and resets performance register. Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails, subnets and time. Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft terminal (LCT) access control of the equipment. Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown (ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting. Querying service alarm: queries the current real alarms on the service path; determines the connectivity or degrade status of the service, according to the current alarm; analyzes the faulty node and locates the faulty board. Detecting the MS protection channel: detects the VC-4 channel alarms on the VC-4 channel that maps the MS protection channel.

l l

4.6 ASON Software


According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane. The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol), OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation protocol-traffic engineering) protocols. Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connection management module.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 68 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture


AOSN software

T2000

Signaling module Cross-connection management module

NE software

Routing module

LMP link management module

Link Management Module


By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:
l l

Create and maintain control channels. Verify member links and TE links.

Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:
l l

Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests. Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.

Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l l l

Collect and flood the TE link information. Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane. Compute service trails and control the routing.

Cross-Connection Management Module


The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l l

Create and delete cross-connections. Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 69 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

5
5.1 Ethernet Features
5.1.1 Functions 5.1.2 Application

Data Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 7500.

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements.

The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. 5.1.3 Protection OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.

5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements. Table 5-1, Table 5-2, Table 5-3, Table 5-4, Table 5-5, Table 5-6 and Table 5-7 list the Ethernet boards that provide the switching function. Table 5-8 lists the Ethernet boards that provide the transparent transmission function. Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame N1EFS4 4 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX None None N2EFS4, N3EFS4 4 FE

In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported, 9600 bytes

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 70 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP IGMP Snooping Encapsulation Link state pass through (LPT) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Committed access rate (CAR) Intra-board link aggregation Flow control Test frame Ethernet OAM Ethernet performance monitoring NSF Function RMON

N1EFS4 4 VC-4

N2EFS4, N3EFS4 8 VC-4

VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12) 12 Supported Supported Supported Not supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p Supported Supported GFP-F (FrameMapped GFP) Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT 24

In compliance with ITU-T G.7042

Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Not supported Supported

In compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 71 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 5-2 Function list of EFS0 and EFS0A Function Interface Interface type Interface board N2EFS0 8 FE N1EFS0A 16 FE N4EFS0 8 FE N5EFS0 8 FE

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8 N1ETF8, N1EFF8 N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8 N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8, N1ETF8A, N1EFF8A

Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP IGMP Snooping Encapsulation

In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 8 VC-4 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4

VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12) 24 Supported Supported Supported Not supported 32 24 24

MartinioE label supported Supported Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p Supported Supported GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P LPT GFP-F GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P and P2MP LPT GFP-F

Link state pass through (LPT)

Supports P2P and P2MP LPT

Supports P2P and P2MP LPT

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 72 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Committed access rate (CAR) Intra-board link aggregation Flow control Test frame Ethernet OAM

N2EFS0

N1EFS0A

N4EFS0

N5EFS0

In compliance with ITU-T G.7042

Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supported Supported Supported Supported

In compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported Not supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah

Ethernet performance monitoring NSF Function RMON

Supported

Not supported Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

Table 5-3 Function list of EGS2 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL N2EGS2 2 GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX None In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12) 48 Supported Supported N3EGS2

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 73 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP IGMP Snooping Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM RMON Link aggregation

N2EGS2 Supported Not supported

N3EGS2

MartinioE label supported Supported Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p Supported Supported GFP-F Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT

In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow. Supported Not supported Not supported

In compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported Supported Not supported Supported Supports manual link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation Supported

Table 5-4 Function list of EGS4 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame N1EGS4 4 x GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX None In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9216 bytes N3EGS4 N4EGS4

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 74 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label VLAN RSTP IGMP Snooping Encapsulation LPT LCAS BPS PPS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Link aggregation

N1EGS4 16 VC-4

N3EGS4

N4EGS4

VC-12: VC-12-xv (x64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8) 64 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services. Supported Supported Not supported Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P and P2MP LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT

In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported Supported Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow. Supported Supported Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported

Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah Supported Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 75 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 5-5 Function list of EMS2 Function Interface Interface type Interface board N1EMS2 2 GE and 16 FE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX Supports 2 x GE if the N1EMS2 board is not used with an interface board. Supports 2 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS2 board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8. In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12) 48 Supported Supports VLAN-based services. Supported Not supported Not supported Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP-F Supports P2P and P2MP LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Not supported Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow. Supported Not supported Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x.

Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label VLAN RSTP IGMP Snooping Encapsulation LPT LCAS BPS/PPS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 76 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Link aggregation

N1EMS2 Supported

Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah Supported Supports manual link aggregation

Table 5-6 Function list of EMS4 Function Interface Interface type Interface board N1EMS4 4 GE and 16 FE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX Supports 4 x GE if the N1EMS4 board is not used with an interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS4 board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8. In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9216 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12: VC-12-xv (x64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8) 64 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services. Supported Supported Not supported Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P and P2MP LPT

Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label VLAN RSTP IGMP Snooping Encapsulation LPT

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 77 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function LCAS BPS/PPS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Link aggregation

N1EMS4 In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow. Supported Supported Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported

Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah Supported Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.

Table 5-7 Function list of EAS2 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping mode N1EAS2 2 x 10GE 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR None In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 64 VC-4 Virtual concatenation: VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8) Contiguous concatenations: VC-4-4C Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL 24 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 78 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS Label VLAN RSTP IGMP Snooping Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Link aggregation

N1EAS2 Supported Supported Not supported Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP-F Supports P2P and P2MP LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, PORT+VLAN flow, PORT+SVLAN flow and PORT+SVLAN+CVLAN flow Supported Supported In compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag Supported Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation, and distributed link aggregation.

Table 5-8 Function list of EGT2, EFT8 and EFT8A Function Interface Interface type N1EGT2, N2EGT2 2 GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX N1EFT8 16 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX N1EFT8A 8 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 79 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function Interface board

N1EGT2, N2EGT2 None

N1EFT8 Supports 8 x FE if the N1EFT8 board is not used with an interface board. Supports 16 x FE if the N1EFT8 board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.

N1EFT8A None

Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode

In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8) 2 Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes 8 VC-4 VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x3) 16 4 VC-4 VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x3) 8

Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet service types MPLS VLAN Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR Flow control Test frame Ethernet OAM Ethernet performance monitoring

Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported Not supported Transparent transmission GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Not supported In compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported Supported 802.1ag Supported Not supported Not supported

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 80 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l l l l

EPL Service EVPL Service EPLAN Service EVPLAN Service

EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services. Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
B PORT2 PORT1 A VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 PORT2 POTR1 A B

NE 1 OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

NE 2

EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l

Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.

As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 81 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services


Headquarters of company A VCTRUNK1 VLAN100 VLAN200 PORT1 VCTRUNK2 Department 1 VLAN100 PORT1 VLAN200 PORT2 Department 2

NE 1

NE 2

OptiX OSN equipment

Enterprise user

VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 7500 adopts three ways to realize convergence and distribution of EVPL services.

EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3. EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4. EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID


B VLAN200 VLAN100 A PORT 1 PORT2 PORT2 VCTRUNK VLAN200 VLAN100 B'

PORT 1

A'

NE 1 Cyber cafe user

NE 2 OptiX OSN equipment

Community user

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 82 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS


Add label PE Department B PORT2 VCTRUNK1 Department A Branch 1 PORT1 ` Department A P P Strip label PE PORT2 Department B

NE 1

PORT1 NE 2 Branch 2

Company A

OptiX OSN equipment

Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ


Add label C-Aware Department B Department A Branch 1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 PORT1 S-Aware Strip label S-Aware C-Aware PORT2 Department B Department A Branch 2

`
NE 2 PORT1

NE 1

Company A

OptiX OSN equipment

EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 7500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service. Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as shown in Figure 5-6.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 83 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 5-6 EPLAN service

PORT1

VB Port 1 1 Department 3 of company A NE3

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VB PORT1 VB VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

PORT1

Port 1 NE 1 Department 1 of company A Access point Company A NE 2

Port 1

Department 2 of company A OptiX OSN equipment

EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements. As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 adopt VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 84 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service


PORT2 PORT1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 Department 3 of company B

VB

Department 3 of company A Port 2 S-Aware VCTRUNK1

Port 1

C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware

NE3

VCTRUNK2

C-Aware PORT2 PORT1

VB
LSP NE 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 LSP NE 2

S-Aware

VB
C-Aware

PORT2 PORT1

Port 1

Department 1 of company A

Department 1 of company B Company A

Department 2 of company A

Department 2 of company B

Acess point

Company B

OptiX OSN equipment

5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services. The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
l l

LCAS The LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change) and protects and restores failed members. For details, refer to . STP/RSTP The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. For details, refer to STP and RSTP. Tributary protection switching (TPS) The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures a reliable operation of the equipment. For details, refer to 7.1.1 TPS Protection. Board protection switching (BPS) The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or

l l l

l l l

l l l

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 85 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection.
l l l

For details, refer to BPS. Port protection switching (PPS) The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary. For details, refer to PPS. Link aggregation group (LAG) A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as one link. For details, refer to LAG. DLAG The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the protection board. During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets. The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive. For details, refer to DLAG. LPT The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected. For details, refer to LPT.

l l l

l l l l

l l l l

MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP


At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.

5.2 RPR Features


The RPR of the OptiX OSN 7500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure. The main features of the RPR are as follows:

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 86 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l l l l l

Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time. Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels. Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the destination node. Solve the fairness and congestion control problems. Provide RPR protection.

The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-8. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other. Figure 5-8 RPR ring
Node 1

Outer ring data Outer ring control

Node 2

2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Inner ring data Inner ring control

Node 3

5.2.1 Functions The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm. 5.2.2 Application The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services. 5.2.3 Protection The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection schemes.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 87 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

5.2.2 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.

Basic Functions
The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-9 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards. Table 5-9 Function list of RPR boards Function Interface Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping granularity EVPL EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN Spanning tree IGMP Snooping RPR protection N2EMR0 1 GE and 12 FE N2EGR2 2 GE

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s) VC-3: VC-3-xv (x2); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8) Supported Supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q. Supports RSTP and STP. Supported Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86. Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI. Supported

Encapsulation LCAS CAR Flow control QoS traffic classification Intra-board link aggregation

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 88 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function Weighted fairness algorithm Topology auto-discovery Maximum number of nodes Service class

N2EMR0 Supported Supported 255

N2EGR2

Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C

Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses. Table 5-10 lists the differences among these classes. Table 5-10 RPR service class Class A Subclass A0 A1 B B_CIR B_EIR C C Bandwidth Pre-allocated, irreclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Preemptible, not pre-allocated Preemptible, not pre-allocated Jitter Low Low Mediu m High High Fairness Algorithm Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Relevant Relevant Application Real-time services Real-time services Near real-time services Near real-time services Best effort transmission

Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR. To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting the existing services.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 89 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-9, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved. Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse
Node 1

Traffic 1 1.25 Gbit/s

Node 2

Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Bandwidth of single ring is 1.25Gbit/s Node 3

Traffic 2 1.25 Gbit/s

Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring. As shown in Figure 5-10, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1. Figure 5-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 90 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1

3 2 Node 2 Node 1

Node Node2 Node3 Node4

Weight 1 1 1

Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5

Node 6 Traffic 1 2 3 Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s

Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different

3 2 Node 2 Node 1

Node Node2 Node3 Node4

Weight 1 3 2

Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5

Node 6 Traffic 1 2 3 Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 600 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s

5.2.3 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.

EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format. Figure 5-12 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 91 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet. Figure 5-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1. Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping

Node 1

Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR FE/GE Node 2 Node 4 FE/GE

LSP Action Tunnel VC Destination Insertion 100 100 Node 4 Action Forwarding Node 3

Action Tunnel VC

Stripping 100 100

Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence


VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Traffic Port1+VLAN 2 Port1+VLAN 3 Port1+VLAN 4 VLAN 4 GE Tunnel 200 300 400 VC 200 300 400 Destination Node 2 Node 3 Node 4

Node 1

FE VLAN 2 Node 2 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 3 Node 4

FE VLAN 4

FE

VLAN 3

EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 92 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 5-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way. Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service
A1 A2 MAC forwarding table of node 1 Port 2 Port 1 MAC A1 A2 B1 B1 Node 1 Dual-ring A2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 B2 Port 2 MAC forwarding table of node 2 Node 3 MAC A1 A2 Port 1 C1 B1 B2 C1 Port rpr1 rpr1 port 1 port 2 rpr1 stack VLAN 100 100 none none 100 Node 4 B2 C1 Port port 1 port 2 rpr1 rpr1 rpr1 stack VLAN none none 100 100 100

Port 1

5.2.4 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection schemes. The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
l l

Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth. In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated. In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 93 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth.
l l l l l l

For details, refer to RPR. LCAS The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the bandwidth. For details, refer to LCAS. RSTP The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. For details, refer to STP and RSTP. Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used. For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.

l l l l

5.3 ATM Features


This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 7500. 5.3.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function. 5.3.2 Application The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services. 5.3.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers.

5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function. An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an ADQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services. Table 5-11 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 94 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 5-11 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1 Function Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection Mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection operation mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection level (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITU-T I.610) ADL4 1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC SFP Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3A board. Not supported 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4 1.2 Gbit/s VC-3; VC-4: VC-4-xv (x4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast ADQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2

1+1, 1:1 Unidirectional, bidirectional

VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), RDI (Remote Defect Indication), LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)

An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services. Table 5-12 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 95 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 5-12 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1 Function Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface IDL4 1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC SFP Not supported IDQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2

IMA (compliant with Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the ATM Forum IMA E1 processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQMA or N1PQM or 1.1 standards) N2PQ1. Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port. Each IMA group supports 132 E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port. Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay. Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection Mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection operation mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection level (ITU-T I.630) 8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4 1 Gbit/s VC-12; VC-4: VC-4-xv (X4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast

1+1, 1:1 Unidirectional, bidirectional

VP-Ring, VC-Ring

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 96 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Function OAM function (ITU-T I.610) Board level 1+1 protection

IDL4 AIS, RDI, LB, CC

IDQ1

Supported, with switching time less than 1s

5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.

Supported Services and Traffic Types


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not support ABR services.
l

The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency. The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate. The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission. The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.

l l l

In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 7500 meets IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-13. Table 5-13 ATM service types and traffic types No. 1 2 Traffic Type atmNoTrafficDescriptor atmNoClpNoScr Service Type UBR UBR.1 CBR 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr atmClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpScr atmClpNoTaggingScr atmClpTaggingScr atmClpTransparentNoScr atmClpTransparentScr atmNoClpTaggingNoScr CBR CBR nrt-VBR.1 nrt-VBR.2 nrt-VBR.3 CBR.1 rt-VBR.1 UBR.2 Parameter None Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 97 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

No. 11

Traffic Type atmNoClpNoScrCdvt

Service Type UBR CBR

Parameter Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

12 13 14

atmNoClpScrCdvt atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt atmClpTaggingScrCdvt

rt-VBR.1 rt-VBR.2 rt-VBR.3

Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services


When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output. As shown in Figure 5-15, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4 bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel. Figure 5-15 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
DSLAM 34M ATM Traffic Service Convergence

NE 1

155M ATM Traffic NE 2

2.5 Gbit/s SDH Ring NE 4

622M ATM Traffic

Router DSLAM

NE 3

34M ATM Traffic DSLAM

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 98 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services


The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs. As shown in Figure 5-16, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s. Figure 5-16 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
DSLAM The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring after converged with local service. NE 1 34M ATM Traffic

155M ATM Traffic VC4-Xv VP/VC-Ring NE 2 DSLAM

NE 4

Router

622M ATM Traffic

NE 3

34M ATM Traffic

DSLAM

Application of IMA Services


The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow. The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently transmitted. Figure 5-17 illustrates the IMA service networking.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 99 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 5-17 IMA service networking

RNC

NE1 T2000 25km NodeB 1 NE2 NE4 STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring 40km

NodeB 4 30km

35km

NE3 NodeB 2

NodeB 3

5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers. The protections that are available are as follows:
l l

ATM layer protections The ATM layer protections are classified in different ways. You can select a combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection. For details, refer to ATM/IMA. Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not performed). For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP. 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For details, refer to ATM/IMA.

l l l

l l l l

5.4 DDN Features


This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 7500.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 100 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

5.4.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services. 5.4.2 Application When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. 5.4.3 Protection The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.

5.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services. Table 5-14 lists the functions and features of the DDN. Table 5-14 Functions and features of DDN Board Feature Processing capability Bandwidth at SDH side Interface specifications Interface impedance Connector type Description Processes eight N x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services, and cross-connects 48 x 64 kbit/s and 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. 48 x E1,and 63 x E1. N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4. 75 ohms or 120 ohms. The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector is used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is used for framed E1 signals. Supports 1:N(N4) TPS protection with the switching time being less than 50 ms. Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports. Supported. A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.

Protection Loopback PRBS self-test Alarm and performance

5.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 101 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed to a transmission network.
l l l l

Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Access and convergence of multipoint routers

The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls. Figure 5-18 DDN networking and application
NE1

Branch of company A

4 x 64k 4 x 64k NE2 NG-SDH NE4 Frame E1

Headquarters of company A

Branch of company B

Frame E1

Headquarters of company B

NE3 OptiX NE Enterprise user

As shown in Figure 5-18, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be performed between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and branches of Company B. The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1 services of Company B can also be transmitted in hybrid mode over the NG-SDH network. For details, see the Planning Guide.

5.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services. In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of the equipment. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports one group of 1:N (N4) TPS protection for the N1DX1 boards.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 102 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

5.5 SAN Features


The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services. The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
l l

The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type. Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 (2125 Mbit/s) service or two FC100 services are supported. The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. FC100 (1062.5 Mbit/s )supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km. The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km. Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON (200 Mbit/s)or 4 x DVB-ASI (270 Mbit/s) services. All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).

l l l l

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 103 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

6
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links 6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

ASON Features

6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies


The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links.

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.

6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links


The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol. When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 6-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 104 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 6-1 Auto-discovery of control links


ASON Domain

When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management system for real-time display. See Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2 Management of control topology

R1

R4

R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 105 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links


The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol. After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide resource topology. ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh. As shown in Figure 6-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed on the NM in real time. Figure 6-3 TE link auto-discovery

R1

R4

R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment

6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration


The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient. The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 106 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing. Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services. For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in Figure 6-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route. The service is created as follows:
l l l l l

Choose the bandwidth granularity. Choose the server level. Choose the source node. Choose the sink node. Create the service.

Figure 6-4 End-to-end service configuration

R1
D A B C

E I F

R4

R2

R3

: ASON NE : User equipment

6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration


The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security. As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 107 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

As shown in Figure 6-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service. Figure 6-5 Trail restoration

R1

E D F A B H G C I

R4

R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment

6.4 ASON Clock Tracing


ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet. In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source. The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20 ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet. In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet is created in one ASON domain.

Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing


The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
l l l

Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock. Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the auto-tracing and auto-switching features. The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 108 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Clock Protection Protocol


To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must start the standard SSM protocol.

Primary Reference Clock Source


Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as the primary clock reference source.
l l l

Line clock source External clock source Internal clock source of edge NEs

For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source. As shown in Figure 6-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. Figure 6-6 ASON clock subnet
BITS Primary base clock source A BITS B Standby base clock source

:ASON NE : BITS

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 109 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing sources for ASON NEs.

Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are selected with priority. For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used. An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way, clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also strengthened.

Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet


The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
l l l

The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest clock quality. If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority. If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority, the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is avoided. If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the entire network are synchronized.

Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet. If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet. If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the ASON clock subnet.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 110 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet


If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source. If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source. If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode. Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.

6.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients. The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection, as listed in Table 6-1. Table 6-1 Service level Service Diamond service Gold service Silver service Copper service Iron service Protection and Restoration Scheme Protection and restoration Protection and restoration Restoration No protection No restoration Preemptable MSP Implementation Means SNCP and rerouting MSP and rerouting Switching and Rerouting Time Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s -

Table 6-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 111 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 6-2 TE links used by ASON services Service Level Working Resource of TE Link Not used Not used Protection Resource of TE Link Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Non-Protection Resource of TE Link Used Used with the priority Used Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough Used Used with the priority Used Used Used Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough

Diam ond servi ce

Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization

Not used Used with the priority Used with the priority Used with the priority Not used Not used

Gold servi ce

Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization

Used when the resource is not enough Not used

Silve r servi ce

Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization

Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Not used Used with the priority Used with the priority

Not used Not used Not used Not used

Cop per servi ce Iron servi ce

Service creation Service optimization Service creation Service optimization

Not used

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 112 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

6.6 Diamond Services


Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation. A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP. Figure 6-7 shows a diamond service. Figure 6-7 Diamond Services
Working LSP

R1
D

R4
I F

A B

C H

R2

R3
Protection LSP :ASON NE :User equipment

There are three types of diamond services.


l l l

Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails. Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail. Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.

Table 6-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service. Table 6-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service. Table 6-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 113 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 6-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
l

If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP. If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability. Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Rerouting

l l l

Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible Best route

Revertive

Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive.


l

After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified. Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections. Supports migration between diamond services and gold services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

Service migration

Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail

Supports manual switching. Supports service optimization. Does not support service association. Support diamond ASON server trails.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 114 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Attribute Alarms to trigger rerouting

Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 6-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
l

When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered. When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered. When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services. Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Rerouting

l l l

Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible Best route

Revertive

Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive.


l

After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified. Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections. Supports migration between diamond services and gold services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

Service migration

Service switching

Supports manual switching.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 115 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Attribute Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting

Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service Supports service optimization. Does not support service association. Support diamond ASON server trails. R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 6-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
l

When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered. When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered. When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not triggered. Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections. Supports migration between diamond services and gold services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

Service migration

Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail

Supports manual switching. Supports service optimization. Does not support service association. Support diamond ASON server trails.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 116 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

6.7 Gold Services


Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization. A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service. As shown in Figure 6-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I. Figure 6-8 Gold services

R1
D A

R4
E F C

MSP
I

MSP
B

MSP
G

R2 R3
:ASON NE :User equipment

Table 6-6 lists the attributes of gold services. Table 6-6 Attributes of gold services Attribute Requirements for creation Gold Service Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 117 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Multiplex section protection

Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services.

Protection and restoration Rerouting

When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed to protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
l l l

Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible Best route

Revertive

Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive.


l

After the automatically revertive gold service is rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.

Preset restoring trail

Supports setting the preset restoring trail.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 118 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Service migration

Supports migration between permanent connections and gold services. Supports migration between gold services and diamond services. Supports migration between gold services and silver services. Supports migration between gold services and copper services.

Service switching Service optimization ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting

Supports manual switching. Supports service optimization. Supports gold ASON server trails. R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

6.8 Silver Services


Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement. Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted. As shown in Figure 6-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 119 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 6-9 A silver service

R1
D A B C

E LSP after rerouting I F

R4

H G

R2 R3
Original LSP : ASON NE : User equipment

Table 6-7 lists the attributes of silver services. Table 6-7 Attributes of silver services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Rerouting Silver Services Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
l l l

Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible Best route

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 120 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Revertive

Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive.


l

After the automatically revertive silver service is rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified. After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.

Preset restoring trail Shared mesh restoration trail Service migration

Supports setting the preset restoring trail. Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive silver trials.
l

Supports migration between permanent connections and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between gold services and silver services. Supports migration between silver services and copper services. Supports service optimization. If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimized before reverting to its original route.

Service optimization

l l

Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting

Supports service association. Supports silver ASON server trails. R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

6.9 Copper Services


The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services. Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute and are interrupted. Table 6-8 lists the attributes of copper services.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 121 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 6-8 Attributes of copper services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Service migration Silver Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. Does not support rerouting.
l

Supports migration between copper services and traditional services. Supports migration between copper services and diamond services. Supports migration between copper services and gold services. Supports migration between copper services and silver services.

Service optimization Service association ASON server trail

Supports service optimization. Supports service association. Supports ASON server trails.

6.10 Iron Services


The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources. An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
l

When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000. When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.

Table 6-9 lists the attributes of iron service.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 122 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 6-9 Attributes of iron services Attribute Requirements for creation Multiplex section protection Iron Service Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
l l l l

Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP

Service restoration Service migration Service optimization

Does not support rerouting. Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent connections. Supports service optimization.

6.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails. When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level for the tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 6-10.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 123 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 6-10 Tunnel

VC4 tunnel

VC12 service

R1

R4

R3

R2

: ASON NE ASON domain : User equipment

The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. As shown in Figure 6-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a diamond ASON server trail, a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards. After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports.
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.

Figure 6-11 Lower cross-connection

VC12 NE1 Crossconnection VC12 Tributary unit

ASON server trail VC4 NE2

VC12

Line unit

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 124 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 6-10 lists the attributes of tunnels. Table 6-10 Attributes of tunnels Attribute Requirem ents for creation Service restoratio n Rerouting Diamond Tunnel Same as diamond services Same as diamond services
l

Gold Tunnel Same as gold services Same as gold services


l

Silver Tunnel Same as silver services Same as silver services


l

Copper Tunnel Same as copper services Does not support rerouting Does not support rerouting

Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.

Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.

Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.

Revertive Pre-config uration of restoring route Service associatio n Service migration

Supported Supported

Supported Supported

Supported Supported

Not supported Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Supported

Supported

Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections. Supports migration between diamond tunnels and gold tunnels. Supports migration between diamond tunnels and silver tunnels. Supports migration between diamond tunnels and copper tunnels. Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels. Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels. Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.

l l l l l l

Service optimizati on Tunnel level

Supports service optimization.

VC-4

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 125 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

6.12 Service Association


The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network. Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points. As shown in Figure 6-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP. Figure 6-12 Service association

R1 1+ 1 protection

E D A B H C

R4 I 1+ 1 protection

R2

G R3 : ASON NE : User equipment

Table 6-11 lists the attributes of service association. Table 6-11 Attributes of service association Attribute Service creation Service optimization Rerouting Service Association Supports the creation of the associated services with the same source node. Supports optimization of associated services. When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 126 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Attribute Service type

Service Association
l l l

Supports the association of two silver services. Supports association of two copper services. Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service. Supports the association of two silver tunnels. Supports the association of two copper tunnels. Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.

l l l

6.13 Service Optimization


After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization. LSP optimization has the following features.
l l l l l

Only manual optimization is supported. The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service. During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed. During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations, optimization is not allowed. The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper and tunnel services.

6.14 Service Migration


OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services.

Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections


Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l l l l l

Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections Migration between gold services and permanent connections Migration between silver services and permanent connections Migration between copper services and permanent connections Migration between iron services and permanent connections Migration between tunnel services and server trail.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 127 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Service Migration between ASON Trails


Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l

Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper service Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper tunnels

6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes


After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes. Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually.

6.16 Preset Restoring Trail


Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail firstly.

6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail


For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail. When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail. As shown in Figure 6-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 128 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 6-13 Shared mesh restoration trail


Revertive silver service 1 A B C

Share MESH restoration trail 1 G Share MESH restoration trail 2 H

D Revertive silver service 2

Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail


The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
l l l l l

Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail. A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels. For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive attribute cannot be changed. The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of TE links. For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the preset restoration trail.

Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.
l

For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used. For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some resources.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 129 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

6.18 Shared Risk Link Group


In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable. The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk. Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.

6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS


The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.

LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 6-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary. Figure 6-14 LCAS (different path)

Path 1

VCTRUNK1 Router A
NE1
Path 2

NE2

Router B

If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As shown in Figure 6-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 130 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 6-15 LCAS (same path)

VCTRUNK1

Router A

NE1

NE2

Router B

ASON Trail Group


An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible. Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 131 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

7
7.1 Equipment Level Protection
7.1.1 TPS Protection

Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies.

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types. 7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner. 7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. 7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes. 7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1 protection. 7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection. 7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. 7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. 7.1.9 Intelligent Fans Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment. 7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 132 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. 7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.

7.1.1 TPS Protection


The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types. Table 7-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 7-2 lists the TPS protection parameters. Table 7-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards Service Type E1/T1 Protection Scheme One 1:N protection (N 4) One 1:N protection (N 3) One 1:1 protection One 1:N protection (N 4) Supported Boards N1PQM, N1PQMA, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a N1PD3, N1PL3, N2SPQ4, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N1SEP1 N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N5EFS0, N1EFS0A N1DX1 Revertive Mode Revertive

E3/T3/E4/S TM-1

Ethernet DDN

a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.

Table 7-2 TPS protection parameters Parameter Priority Switching type Switching condition Description 1X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the highest priority. Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching, and automatic switching. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l l

The clock of the working board is lost. The working board is offline. The working board is cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 133 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Switching time Revertive mode WTR time

Description 50 ms Revertive 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.

7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner. For the OptiX OSN 7500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 7-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units. Table 7-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Slot 9 and slot 10

Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:


l l l

The working board is offline. The working board is cold reset. The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is triggered. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.

l l

Revertive mode

Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.

7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit


With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. For the OptiX OSN 7500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication (SCC) functions. The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state. Table 7-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 134 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 7-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Slot 24 and slot 25

Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:


l l l l

The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.

Revertive mode

Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.

7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards


The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes. The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection. The N1EAS2 board only supports the DLAG protection. Table 7-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards. Table 7-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition BPS, PPS DLAG

The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the bandwidth of the working board.

Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:


l

Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:


l

The port status of the working board is Link Down. The clock of the working board is lost. The hardware of the working board fails. The working board is off line. A switching command is issued.

The port to be protected on the working board is in the Link Down state. The clock of the working board is lost. The hardware of the working board fails. The working board is off line. The working board fails to transmit and receive packets, but the protection board transmits and receives packets

l l

l l

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 135 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter

BPS, PPS 350 ms

DLAG successfully. In full duplex mode: 4 s In auto-negotiation mode: 500 ms

Switching time

Revertive mode

Non-revertive mode

l l

Revertive (default) Non-revertive

When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS or DLAG protection switching, the following conditions must be met.
l l

The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode as the protection group. The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends. The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.

The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the protection group.

7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards


The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1 protection. The N1IDQ1 and N1IDL4 boards support the DPS. When the DPS needs to be configured. Table 7-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards. Table 7-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Description Configured as required.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 136 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Switching condition

Description Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:


l l l l l l

A manual switching command is issued. The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The power supply of the working board fails. The clock of the working board fails. The hardware of the working board fails.

Revertive mode Switching time

Non-revertive 50 ms

7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards


The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection. Table 7-7 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards Parameter Switching condition (the switching occurs if one condition is met) Description The hardware of the IF board or the IF unit is faulty. The hardware of the ODU is faulty. POWER_FAIL VOLT_LOS (IF board) RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW RADIO_RSL_HIGH IF_INPWR_ABN CONFIG_NOSUPPORT R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS MW_LOF MW_RDI The board is offline. Switching time Revertive mode WTR time 500 ms Revertive 300720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 137 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 7-8 N+1 protection for the microwave boards Parameter Switching condition (the switching occurs if one condition is met) Description R_LOS R_LOF R_LOC MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD(Optional condition) MW_LOF The board is offline. Switching time Revertive mode WTR time 50 ms Revertive 300720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)

7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit


The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. The OptiX OSN 7500 can access two 48 V DC power supplies by using two T1PIU boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the equipment.

7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit


The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. In the OptiX OSN 7500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving. A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. Table 7-9 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board. Table 7-9 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Description Configurable as required.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 138 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Switching condition

Description Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:


l l

The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.

Revertive mode Switching time

Non-revertive 50 ms

7.1.9 Intelligent Fans


Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment. The OptiX OSN 7500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The power supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup. The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection. When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the full speed. The running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan module.

7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply


The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the T1AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.

7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions


The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.

Power-Down Protection During Software Loading


The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.

Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply


The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning. When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can re-initialize the chip.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 139 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal. When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.

Board Temperature Detection


Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.

7.2 Network Level Protection


The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection. 7.2.1 Linear MSP The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP. 7.2.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. 7.2.3 SNCP The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. 7.2.4 DNI The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure. 7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly. 7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. 7.2.7 RPR Protection The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 140 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.

7.2.1 Linear MSP


The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP. The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 1+1 and 1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 120 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841. For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System Planning Guidelines.

7.2.2 MSP Ring


The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841. Table 7-10 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 7-10 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 Protection Scheme STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported 7 14 22 40

The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 has the following features.

Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain. In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 141 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.

Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section


For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 7500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface.

MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level. In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs. To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 7500 node sets up a detailed list of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may be misconnected.
The equipment supports the function of querying the MSP squelching. After the MS protocol module triggers the MS squelching function and delivers the squelching status information to a line board, the cross-connect board initiates a command to query the current MS squelching status of the handshake detection board. Then, the cross-connect board compares the squelching status with the relevant information stored on the cross-connect board. If the squelching status is inconsistent with each other, the cross-connect board issues a command to correct the MS squelching status.

7.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP of the VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, and AU-3 services.

SNCP
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 7-1.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 142 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 7-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
The unprotected trail

NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5

NE6 NE7 NE8

Convert to an unprotected trail The working trail

Convert to an SNCP-protected trail

NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5

NE6 NE7 NE8

The protction trail

The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 7500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP protection pairs. In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:
l l l l l l

Manual switching to protection path Manual switching to working path Forced switching to protection path Forced switching to working path Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting Revertive mode setting

SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path) protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection scheme. The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 7500 support a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP schemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 1008 SNCMP protection groups. The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 143 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 7-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path. Figure 7-2 Principle of multipath protection
A B Working Source Protection 1 Protection 2 Protection 3 Intermediate subnetworks Sink

In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 7-3, two protection paths protect a working path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path. Figure 7-3 SNCMP networking

NE 3

NE 4

NE 2 Working Microware Radio

Protection 1

NE 1

Protection 2

Microware Radio

When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 7-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 144 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 7-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure

NE 3

NE 4

NE 2 Working Microware Radio

Protection 1

NE 1

Protection 2

Microware Radio

When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty, as shown in Figure 7-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2. Figure 7-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure

NE 3

NE 4

NE 2 Working Microware Radio

Protection 1

NE 1

Protection 2

Microware Radio

SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 896 SNCTP groups. The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 145 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

7.2.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842. The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
l l l

Two SNCP rings An SNCP ring and an MSP ring Two MSP rings

Figure 7-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings. Figure 7-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
NE A

SNCP Ring 1 NE C NE D

NE E SNCP Ring 2

NE F

NE G Selecting Point Forward Working Routing Reverse Working Routing

When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
l l l l l l l

A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1. A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2. A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings. NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty. NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty. NE C and NE E are faulty. NE D and NE F are faulty.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 146 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.

7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection


When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly. Figure 7-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. Figure 7-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-64 STM-64

STM-16 SNCP

STM-16 MSP

7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP


In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process multiple sets of independent K bytes. The T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SL64, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N1SLO16, N2SL16, N1SF16, N3SL16, N1SF64, and N1SF64A boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SF64 and SL64 boards support STM-64 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and seventeenth VC-4s. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SF16 and SL16 boards support STM-16 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and fifth VC-4s. Figure 7-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 147 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 7-8 Optical-path-shared MSP

STM-4/16

STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-16/64

STM-4/16

STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-4/16 STM-4/16

For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in Figure 7-9. Figure 7-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
MSP ring 1 STM-16 STM-64 MSP ring 2 STM-16

The OptiX OSN 7500 also supports the line units at the same rate to form a shared protection group in two directions, as shown in Figure 7-10. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group. Figure 7-10 One line shared by two lines at the same rate
MSP ring 1 STM-16 STM-16 MSP ring 2 STM-16

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 148 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

7.2.7 RPR Protection


The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. Figure 7-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet. Figure 7-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 4 Outer ring

Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5

Node 1 Node 2

In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets. The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 7-12.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 149 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 7-12 RPR wrapping protection


Node 4 Outer ring

Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5

Node 2

Node 1 Wapping

The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber cut. See Figure 7-13. Figure 7-13 RPR steering protection
Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5

Node 1 Node 2 Steering

In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.

7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection


The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 150 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Figure 7-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths. Figure 7-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE2

Working path ATM service NE1 Protection path NE3 ATM service

NE4

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 151 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

8
8.1 Operation and Maintenance
Alarm and Performance Management
l l

OAM

The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 7500 are designed according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 7500 provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.

In the case of an emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures. The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment. Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly. Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1000, the NE reports that excessive alarms are generated. Then, the board does not report excessive alarms. The NG-SDH equipment supports the alarm muting function. You can mute an alarm by pressing the key on the GSCC board or by using the NM interface. The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms. The working temperature of certain boards can be queried. When an MSP switching or a TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator focuses on the service state only.

l l

l l

l l

ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
l

When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 152 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time.
l

After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.

Optical Power Management


l l

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH and Ethernet optical interfaces. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate, and wavelength. The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which facilitates the maintenance. The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.

Multiple Maintenance Methods


l l l

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other. The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms of each equipment in a network. The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 7500 system. The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N1PQMA, N2PQ1 line boards and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel the collection according to the requirement. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the board version replacement function. This helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the board of a new version are the same as the configuration and service status of the board of a old version old. Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults. The alarms of the services can be queried. The connectivity status of the services can be determined. The faulty node can be analyzed.

l l

l l l l

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 153 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l

The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled. After being inserted, the board does not work if the total power consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the equipment. The port status can be queried. The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities can be traced to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities. The enabling state of detecting the alarms in the MSP protection path can be queried. The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted according to the daylight saving time in the country.

l l l l

8.2 Network Management


The OptiX OSN 7500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 154 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

9
l l l

Security Management

9.1 Authentication Management


Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication. NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid user name and a valid password. NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique. Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE. NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE. NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent other users from operating the locked modules. Query the online NE users.

l l l

9.2 Authorization Management


Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
l

NE user management:

According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending order. According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users, CMD NE users, and general NE users. Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag. Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, or change the user flag. Delete NE users.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 155 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l

NE user group management:

According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group. Modify the group of a user.

9.3 Network Security Management


Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectively manage the NEs.
l l

The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe. Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.

For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only to check the source address of the IP packets only. For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets. If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advanced ACL rule to check the packets. Query the ACL rule. Modify the ACL rule. Delete the ACL rule. Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to access it over the Ethernet network. Access through the serial interface. Access through the OAM port. Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM access function can be enabled when necessary.

An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:


Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the T2000. When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and password) is encrypted.

9.4 System Security Management


Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed forcibly.
l

Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 156 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description
l l l l l

Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm after a user logs in to the NE. Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password. Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts. Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts. Query or set the password uniqueness.

9.5 Log Management


The OptiX OSN 7500 provides log management functions. 9.5.1 NE Security Log Management The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations. 9.5.2 Syslog Management The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.

9.5.1 NE Security Log Management


The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
l l

Query the security logs of the NE. Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.

9.5.2 Syslog Management


The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol. The OptiX OSN 7500 supports:
l l l l l

Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP Adding and deletion of Syslog servers Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at the same time Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server and the NE

Figure 9-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 157 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode. Figure 9-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NE B

NMS

NE A (client) ECC/ IP OVER DCC TCP/IP real time security log

NE C (client)

Syslog Server B

Syslog Server A

NE D

Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all NEs in a network. A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log server. In Figure 9-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.

When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required. When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D. For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Optical Switching System Configuration Guide.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 158 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

10

Technical Specifications

10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment


The overall specifications of the equipment include the specifications of the cabinet, specifications of the subrack, power supply parameters, timeslot numbering, laser safety class, timing and synchronization performance, transmission performance, protection performance, and environmental specification. 10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of permitted subracks. 10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption. 10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters The equipment supports the access of the 48 V or 60 V DC power. 10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes. 10.1.5 Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M. 10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813. 10.1.7 Transmission Performance The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards. 10.1.8 Protection Performance The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements. 10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 159 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. 10.1.10 Environmental Specification The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.

10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet


The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of permitted subracks. Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet. Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet Dimensions (mm) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (T63E) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (N63E) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (T63E) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (N63E) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) (T63E) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) Weight (kg) 55 42 79 60 45 84 70 94 Number of Permitted Subracks 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2

10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack


The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption. Table 10-2 lists the dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack. Table 10-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack Dimensions (mm) 496.4 (W) x 295 (D) x 756.7 (H) Weight (kg) 30 (net weight of the subrack that

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 160 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Dimensions (mm)

Weight (kg) is not installed with boards)

Table 10-3 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack. Table 10-3 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack Maximum Power Consumption 1000 W Fuse Capacity 32 A

10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters


The equipment supports the access of the 48 V or 60 V DC power. Table 10-4 lists the power supply parameters. Table 10-4 Power supply parameters Item Power supply mode Nominal voltage Voltage range Maximum power consumption Maximum current Specification DC power supply 48 V or 60 V 38.4 V to 57.6 V or 48 V to 72 V 1000 W 25 A

10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering


The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes. Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 describe the two TU-12 numbering schemes of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-5 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme I) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 TUG2 (7-2) TUG2 (7-3) TUG (7-4) TUG (7-5) TUG (7-6) TUG (7-7)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 161 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

TUG2 (7-1) (3-3)

TUG2 (7-2)

TUG2 (7-3)

TUG (7-4)

TUG (7-5)

TUG (7-6)

TUG (7-7)

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3

Table 10-6 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme II) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) TUG2 (7-2) TUG2 (7-3) TUG2 (7-4) TUG2 (7-5) TUG2 (7-6) TUG2 (7-7)

1 2 4 4 2 4 7 2 4 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 4 6 2 3 5 6 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 4 5 2 4 8 2 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 3 4 6 7 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 2 4 6 2 4 9 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 6 2 4 6 4 5 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3

10.1.5 Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M. Table 10-7 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards. Table 10-7 Laser safety class Laser Safety Class Class 1 Board N1SL64, T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SF64, N1SF64A, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N1SLO16, N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N3SLO1, N3SLN, N3SLQ41, N3SLD41, N3SL41, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SLT1, N3SLT1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, N1SLH1, N1SLH1A, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGT2, N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4, N1EAS2, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8 N1RPC01, N1RPC02 BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4, N1IFSD1

Class 4 Class 1M

10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance


The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 162 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-8 lists the timing and synchronization performance. Table 10-8 Timing and synchronization performance Performance Output Jitter Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode Description ITU-T G.813 compliant ITU-T G.813 compliant ITU-T G.813 compliant

10.1.7 Transmission Performance


The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards. Table 10-9 lists the transmission performance. Table 10-9 Transmission performance Performance Jitter at STM-N Interface Jitter at PDH Interface Bit Error Description Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825 Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783 Compliant with ITU-T G.826

10.1.8 Protection Performance


The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.

Linear MSP
Table 10-10 lists the linear MSP parameters. Table 10-10 Linear MSP parameters Protection Type 1+1 single-ended switching 1+1 single-ended switching 1+1 dual-ended switching Revertive Mode Non-revert ive Revertive Switching Protocol Not required Not required APS protocol Switching Time 50 ms Default WTR Time Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l

50 ms

600s

R_LOS R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD

Non-revert ive

50 ms

l l

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 163 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Protection Type 1+1 dual-ended switching 1:N (N14) dual-ended switching

Revertive Mode Revertive

Switching Protocol APS protocol APS protocol

Switching Time 50 ms

Default WTR Time 600s

Switching Condition

Revertive

50 ms

600s

MSP Ring
Table 10-11 lists the MSP ring parameters. Table 10-11 MSP ring parameters Protection Type Two-fiber bidirectiona l MSP Revertiv e Mode Revertive Switching Mode Switchi ng Time 50 ms Default WTR Time 600s Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l

Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching - ring Manual switching - ring Exercise switching - ring Forced switching - span Manual switching - span Exercise switching - span

R_LOS R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching

Two-fiber unidirection al MSP

Revertive

50 ms

600s

l l l l

Four-fiber bidirectiona l MSP

Revertive

50 ms

600s

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 164 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

SNCP
Table 10-12 lists the SNCP parameters. Table 10-12 SNCP parameters Protectio n Type SNCP Revertive Mode Revertive Non-rever tive Switching Time 50 ms 50 ms Default WTR Time 600s Switching Conditions Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC4 level SNCP:
l l l l l l l l l l l

R_LOS R_LOF R_LOC MS_AIS B2_EXC AU_AIS AU_LOP B3_EXC (Optional) B3_SD (Optional) HP_UNEQ (Optional) HP_TIM (Optional)

Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC3 level SNCP:
l l l l

TU_LOP TU_AIS B3_EXC (Optional) B3_SD (Optional)

Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC12 level SNCP:
l l l l

TU_LOP TU_AIS BIP_EXC (Optional) BIP_SD (Optional)

10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility


The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. Table 10-13 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 165 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-13 EMC test results Item Radiated emission Standard CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A Conducted emission for DC ports CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Conducted emission for signal ports Immunity to radiated electromagnetic field Immunity to electrostatic discharge CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz2700 MHz: 10 V/m) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: 8 kV; contact discharge: 6 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: 1 kV, line to ground: 2 kV) Immunity to surges for signal ports Immunity to continuous conducted interference for DC ports Immunity to continuous conducted interference for signal ports Immunity to continuous voltage dips and short interruption and voltage variation for DC power port ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-29

Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for DC ports Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for signal ports Immunity to surges for DC ports

10.1.10 Environmental Specification


The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation. The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table 10-14.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 166 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-14 Environment specifications for long-term operation Specifications Altitude Air pressure Temperature Description 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 0 to 45

Relative humidity 10% to 90% Anti-seismic performance Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD

10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4 optical interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic also provides information on wavelength allocation. 10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces. 10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces. 10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces. 10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces. 10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. 10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500. 10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. 10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 167 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces. Table 10-15 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-15 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 155520 kbit/s I-1 0 to 2 1260 to 1360 Ie-1 0 to 2 1260 to 1360 S-1.1 2 to 20 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 20 to 60 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 Ve-1.2

60 to 80 80 to 100 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580

Single-mode LC 15 to 8 23 8 8.2 19 to 14 31 14 10 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 5 to 0 34 10 10 5 to 0 34 10 10 3 to 0 34 10 10

10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces. Table 10-16 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-16 Parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Value 622080 kbit/s I-4 0 to 2 S-4.1 2 to 20 L-4.1 20 to 50 L-4.2 50 to 80 Ve-4.2 80 to 100

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 168 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

Value 1261 to 1360 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580

Single-mode LC 15 to 8 23 8 8.2 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 3 to 2 28 8 10 3 to 2 28 8 10 3 to 2 34 13 10.5

10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces. Table 10-17 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-17 Parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Value 2488320 kbit/s I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2J e V-16.2J e (BA) U-16.2J e (BA+PA ) 145 to 200 1550.12

Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber

0 to 2 1266 to 1360

2 to 25 1260 to 1360

25 to 50 1280 to 1335

50 to 80 1500 to 1580

80 to 105 1530 to 1560

105 to 145 1530 to 1565

Single-mode LC

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 169 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Launched optical power range (dBm)

Value 10 to 3 5 to 0 2 to +3 2 to +3 5 to +7 Without the booster amplifie r (BA): 2 to +3 With the BA: 13 to 15 Without the BA or pre-amp lifier (PA): 2 to +3 With the BA: 15 to 18 Without the BA or PA: 28 With the PA: 32

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

18

18

27

28

28

28

Minimum overload (dBm)

Without the BA or PA: 9 With the PA: 10

Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

12

1200 to 1600 8.2

2000

2800

3400

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

Table 10-18 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-18 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Meaning of the code
a

Value 2666057 kbit/s Ue-16.2c FEC + BA (14 dB) + PA 1550.12 Ue-16.2d FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA 1550.12 Ue-16.2f FEC + BA (17 dB) + RA + PA 1550.12

Operating wavelength range (nm)

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 170 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm)

Value Single-mode LC Without the BA or PA: 5 to 1 With the BA: 13 to 15 Without the BA or PA: 5 to 1 With the BA: 13 to 15 Without the BA or PA: 27.5 With the PA: 37 10 10 Without the BA, RA, or PA: 5 to 1 With the BA: 15 to 18 Without the BA, RA, or PA: 27.5 With the PA: 42 10 10

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

Without the BA or PA: 27.5 With the PA: 37

Minimum overload (dBm)b Minimum extinction ratio (dB)c

10 10

a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, and PA are used. b: The parameter values are only for the PA. c: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier are not provided.

10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces. Table 10-19 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-19 Parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Value 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2 b 2 to 35 L-64.2 b (BA) 35 to 80 Le-64. 2 35 to 55 Ls-64. 2 55 to 75 V-64.2b (BA+PA+ DCU) 80 to 152

0 to 2

0 to 25

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 171 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm)

Value 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1550.12

Single-mode LC 6 to 1 5 to 1 1 to +2 Withou t the BA: 4 to +2 With the BA: 13 to 15 2 to 4 4 to 7 Without the BA, PA, or DCU: 4 to 1 With the BA: 13 to 15 21 21 Without the BA, PA, or DCU: 14 With the PA: 26

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

11

14

14

14

Minimum overload (dBm) Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

6.6

500

800

1600

1200

1600

2040 (with the DCU) 8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

Table 10-20 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-20 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Meaning of the codea Value 10709225 kbit/s Ue-64.2c FEC + BA (14 dB) + PA + DCU (60 + 80)c Ue-64.2d FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA + DCU (80 x 2) Ue-64.2e FEC + BA (17 dB) + RA + PA + DCU (60 x 3)

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 172 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm)b Receiver sensitivity (dBm)b Minimum overload (dBm)b Minimum extinction ratio (dB)b Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)b

Value 1550.12 1550.12 1550.12

Single-mode LC 4 to 1 4 to 1 4 to 1

14 1 10

14 1 10

14 1 10

800

800

800

a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier (RA) are used. b: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided. c: The parameter values indicate the distances that correspond to different dispersion compensation values.

10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-21 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-21 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Dispersion-limite d distance (km) Value 2488320 kbit/s 170 640 2666057 kbit/s 640 9953280 kbit/s 40 10709225 kbit/s 40

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 173 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) (dB)

Value 2 to +3 28 9 3400 5 to 1 5 to 1 4 to 1 4 to 1

28 9 12800

28 9 12800

14 1 800

14 1 800

8.2

10

10

10

10

Without the FEC: 21

With the FEC: 16 Without the FEC: 21

Without the FEC: 26

With the FEC: 20 Without the FEC: 26

10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation


This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500. The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the output of the wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system. Table 10-22 provides the wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces. Table 10-22 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Frequency (THz) 192.1 192.2 192.3 192.4 192.5 192.6 192.7 192.8 Wavelength (nm) 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17 1557.36 1556.56 1555.75 1554.94 No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Frequency (THz) 194.1 194.2 194.3 194.4 194.5 194.6 194.7 194.8 Wavelength (nm) 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.98

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 174 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Frequency (THz) 192.9 193.0 193.1 193.2 193.3 193.4 193.5 193.6 193.7 193.8 193.9 194.0

Wavelength (nm) 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 1551.72 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32 1548.51 1547.72 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32

No. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Frequency (THz) 194.9 195.0 195.1 195.2 195.3 195.4 195.5 195.6 195.7 195.8 195.9 196.0

Wavelength (nm) 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68 1531.90 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55

10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. The characteristics of the 10-Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3ae. The characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3z. The characteristics of the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3u. Table 10-23 lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces. Table 10-23 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Type of Interface Type of Fiber Launched Optical Power (dBm) Operatin g Wavelen gth Range (nm) 1500 to 1580 1275 to 1350 Minimu m Overload (dBm) Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimu m Extinctio n Ratio (dB) 9

1000BAS E-ZX (80 km) 1000BAS E-VX (40 km)

Singlemode LC Singlemode LC

2 to +5

22

4.5 to 0

23

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 175 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Type of Interface

Type of Fiber

Launched Optical Power (dBm)

Operatin g Wavelen gth Range (nm) 1270 to 1355 770 to 860 1261 to 1360 1270 to 1380 1260 to 1355 1260 to 1355

Minimu m Overload (dBm)

Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm)

Minimu m Extinctio n Ratio (dB) 9

1000BAS E-LX (10 km) 1000BAS E-SX (0.5 km) 100BAS E-FX (15 km) 100BAS E-FX (2 km) 10GBAS E-LR (LAN) 10GBAS E-LW (WAN)

Singlemode LC Multimode LC Singlemode LC Singlemode LC Singlemode LC Singlemode LC

9 to 3

19

9.5 to 0

17

15 to 8

28

10

19 to 14

14

30

10

-6 to -1

0.5

-12.6

3.5

-6 to -1

0.5

-12.6

3.5

10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. Table 10-24 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-25 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-24 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Value 155520 kbit/s Ie-1 0 to 2 S-1.1 2 to 20 L-1.1 20 to 60 L-1.2 60 to 80 Ve-1.2 80 to 100

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 176 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Parameter Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

Value 1260 to 1360 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580

Single-mode LC 19 to 14 31 14 10 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 5 to 0 34 10 10 5 to 0 34 10 10 3 to 0 34 10 10

Table 10-25 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 2 to 20 1274 to 1356 Single-mode LC -15 to -8 28 8 8.2 -3 to +2 28 8 10 -3 to +2 28 8 10 -3 to +2 34 13 10.5 L-4.1 20 to 50 1280 to 1335 L-4.2 50 to 80 1480 to 1580 Ve-4.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580

10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces and DDN electrical interfaces.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 177 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces. 10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.

10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces. Table 10-26 lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500. Table 10-26 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces Type of Electrical Interface Line code pattern Signal bit rate at the output interface Allowed frequency deviation at the input interface Allowed attenuation at the input interface Input jitter tolerance 1544 kbit/s B8ZS, AMI 2048 kbit/s HDB3 34368 kbit/s HDB3 44736 kbit/s B3ZS 139264 kbit/s CMI 155520 kbit/s CMI

Complies with ITU-T G.703.

Complies with ITU-T G.703.

10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces. Table 10-27 lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces. Table 10-27 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces Type of Interface Framed E1 interface Description Framed E1 signal Standard The physical and electrical characteristics of the interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame structure of the interface complies with ITU-T G.704.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 178 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Type of Interface Nx64 kbit/s interface

Description V.35 interface V.24 interface X.21 interface RS-449 interface RS-530 interface RS-530A interface

Standard Complies with ITU-T V.35. Complies with ITU-T V.24. Complies with ITU-T X.21. Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and RS-422A). Complies with EIA RS-530. Complies with EIA RS-530A.

10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces


This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces, RS-232 interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces. 10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703. 10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703. 10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232. 10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422. 10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.

10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications


The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The specifications of the clock interface are listed as Table 10-28. Table 10-28 Specifications of the clock interface Specifications Output frequency accuracy Description Compliant with G.813

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 179 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Specifications Output jitter

Description 0.05 UIpp

10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications


The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface are listed as Table 10-29. Table 10-29 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface Specifications Bit rate Timing signals Coding style Compliant Output interface characteristics Incoming interface characteristics Description 64 kbit/s From RX Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Compliant with ITU-T G.703

10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications


The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232. The specifications of the RS-232 interface are listed as Table 10-30. Table 10-30 Specifications of the RS-232 interface Specifications Bit rate Mode Electrical levels Description 19.2 kbit/s RS-232 Tx & Rx data only 5V15V

10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications


The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422. The specifications of the RS-422 interface are listed as Table 10-31.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 180 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-31 Specifications of the RS-422 interface Specifications Bit rate Mode Electrical levels Description 19.2 kbit/s RS-422 Tx & Rx data only 2.0V

10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications


The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T. The specifications of the orerwire phone interface are listed as Table 10-32. Table 10-32 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface Specifications Speech channel interface Impedance Bandwidth Operating current Input gain Output gain Signalling Analog EOW extension Impedance Bandwidth Tx level Rx level 600 ohms 300 Hz3400 Hz 3.5 dBr 1 dBr 3.5 dBr 1 dBr 600 ohms 300 Hz3400 Hz 18 mA 4/0/0 dB 0/7/0 dB DTMF compliant with ITU-T Rec. Q.23 Description

10.5 Microwave RF Performance


This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity, transceiver performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal processing performance of the modem, and link reliability. 10.5.1 Radio Work Modes The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave frames.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 181 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

10.5.2 Frequency Band Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands. 10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities. 10.5.4 Transceiver Performance Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances. 10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for fighting against multipath fading. 10.5.6 IF Performance The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals. 10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals. 10.5.8 Equipment Reliability The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link reliabilities.

10.5.1 Radio Work Modes


The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave frames. Table 10-33 Radio work modes Service Capacity 4E1 4E1 8E1 8E1 16E1 16E1 STM-1 22E1 26E1 32E1 Modulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM 128QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 7 3.5 14 (13.75) 7 28 (27.5) 14 (13.75) 28 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75)

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 182 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Service Capacity 35E1 44E1 53E1

Modulation Scheme 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM

Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5)

l l

The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 600. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

10.5.2 Frequency Band


Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands. The OptiX OSN equipment supports two types of ODUs, that is, standard power ODU (SP ODU) and high power ODU (HP ODU). The following three table respectively list the frequency information on three types of ODUs, that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and HP ODU. Table 10-34 Frequency Band (SP ODU) Frequency Band 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz Frequency Range (GHz) 7.0937.897 7.7318.496 10.67511.745 12.75113.248 14.40315.348 17.68519.710 21.20023.618 24.54926.453 37.04439.452 T/R Spacing (MHz) 154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245 119, 126, 266, 311.32 490, 500, 530 266 315, 322, 420, 490, 728 1008, 1010, 1560 1008, 1200, 1232 1008 1260

Table 10-35 Frequency Band (SPA ODU) Frequency Band 6 GHz Frequency Range (GHz) 5.8506.425 (L6) 6.4257.125 (U6) 7 GHz 7.0937.897 T/R Spacing (MHz) 252.04, 300 (L6) 340 (U6) 154, 161, 168, 196, 245

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 183 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Frequency Band 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz

Frequency Range (GHz) 8.2798.496 10.70011.700 12.75113.248 14.40015.358 17.68519.710 21.20023.618

T/R Spacing (MHz) 119, 126, 266, 311.32 490, 500, 530 266 420, 490 1008, 1010 1008, 1232

Table 10-36 Frequency Band (HP ODU) Frequency Band 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 32 GHz 38 GHz Frequency Range (GHz) 7.0937.897 7.7318.497 10.67511.745 12.75113.248 14.40015.358 17.68519.710 21.20023.618 24.25026.453 31.81533.383 37.04440.105 T/R Spacing (MHz) 154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 311.32 490, 500, 530 266 315, 322, 420, 475, 490, 640, 644, 728 1008, 1010, 1560 1008, 1200, 1232 800, 1008 812 700, 1260

10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity


Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 184 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

l l

For a guaranteed value, remove 3 dB from the typical value. As listed in the following three tables, the radio work modes corresponding to the receiver sensitivity use the microwave frame structure based on TU or STM-1.

Table 10-37 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (i) Item Performance 4xE1 QPSK RSL@BER=106 (dBm) @6GHz @7GHz @8GHz @11GHz @13GHz @15GHz @18GHz @23GHz @26GHz @32GHz @38GHz 91.5 91.5 91.5 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 90.5 90.0 89.0 88.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.0 87.0 87.0 87.0 86.5 86.0 85.0 84.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 88.0 88.0 88.0 88.0 87.5 87.0 86.0 85.5 84.5 84.5 84.5 84.0 84.0 84.0 84.0 83.5 83.0 82.0 81.5 85.5 85.5 85.5 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0 84.5 84.0 83.0 82.5 81.5 81.5 81.5 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0 80.5 80.0 79.0 78.5 16QAM 8xE1 QPSK 16QAM 16xE1 QPSK 16QAM

Table 10-38 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (ii) Item Performance 22xE1 32QAM
6

26xE1 64QAM

32xE1 128QAM

35xE1 16QAM

44xE1 32QAM

53xE1 64QAM

RSL@BER=10 (dBm) @6GHz @7GHz @8GHz @11GHz @13GHz @15GHz 80.5 80.5 80.5 80.0 80.0 80.0 76.5 76.5 76.5 76.0 76.0 76.0 73.0 73.0 73.0 72.5 72.5 72.5 79.0 79.0 79.0 78.5 78.5 78.5 77.5 77.5 77.5 77.0 77.0 77.0 73.5 73.5 73.5 73.0 73.0 73.0

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 185 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Item

Performance 22xE1 32QAM 26xE1 64QAM 76.0 75.5 75.0 74.0 73.5 32xE1 128QAM 72.5 72.0 71.5 70.5 70.0 35xE1 16QAM 78.5 78.0 77.5 76.5 76.0 44xE1 32QAM 77.0 76.5 76.0 75.0 74.5 53xE1 64QAM 73.0 72.5 72.0 71.0 70.5

@18GHz @23GHz @26GHz @32GHz @38GHz

80.0 79.5 79.0 78.0 77.5

Table 10-39 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (iii) Item Performance STM-1 128QAM RSL@BER=106 (dBm) @6GHz @7GHz @8GHz @11GHz @13GHz @15GHz @18GHz @23GHz @26GHz @32GHz @38GHz 69.5 69.5 69.5 69.0 69.0 69.0 69.0 68.5 68.0 67.0 66.5

10.5.4 Transceiver Performance


Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances. The following three table lists the transceiver performances of three types of ODUs, that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and HP ODU.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 186 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-40 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU) Item Performance QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM

Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm) @7GHz @8GHz @11GHz @13GHz @15GHz @18GHz @23GHz @26GHz @38GHz Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm) 25.5 25.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 24 22.5 22 20.5 4 21.0 21.0 20 20 20 20 19 18 16 15.0 15.0 14 14 14 14 13 12 10

Nominal 20 maximum receive power (dBm) Frequency stability (ppm) 5

Table 10-41 Transceiver Performance (SPA ODU) Item Performance QPSK Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm) @6GHz @7GHz @8GHz @11GHz @13GHz @15GHz @18GHz 26.5 25.5 25.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 22.5 24.0 21.5 21.5 22 20 20 19 23.0 20.0 20.0 18 18 18 17 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 187 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Item

Performance QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 19 64QAM/128QAM 16

@23GHz Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm) Nominal maximum receive power (dBm) Frequency stability (ppm)

22.5 0

20

Table 10-42 Transceiver Performance (HP ODU) Item Performance QPSK Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm) @7GHz @8GHz @11GHz @13GHz @15GHz @18GHz @23GHz @26GHz @32GHz @38GHz 30 30 28 26 26 25.5 25 25 23 23 28 28 26 23 23 22 22 22 21 20 24 24 21 18 18 17 17 17 16 16 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM

Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm) @7GHz @8GHz @11GHz @13GHz @15GHz @18GHz 9 9 6 3 3 2

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 188 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Item

Performance QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM

@23GHz @26GHz @32GHz @38GHz Nominal maximum receive power (dBm) Frequency stability (ppm)

2 2 1 1 20

10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance


The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for fighting against multipath fading. Table 10-43 Anti-multipath fading performance Item STM-1/128QAM W-curve STM-1/128QAM W-curve Performance See Figure 10-1. 51 dB.

Figure 10-1 W-curve

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 189 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

10.5.6 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals. Table 10-44 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 10 350 140 50 Performance

10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem


The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals. Table 10-45 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Performance
l l

Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH signals

Adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals

Consisting of the 24-tap feed forward equalizer filter and the 3-tap decision feedback equalizer.

10.5.8 Equipment Reliability


The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link reliabilities.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 190 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-46 Link reliability per hop Item Performance 1+0 Non-protection Configuration MTBF (h) MTTR (h) Availability 14.71x104 1 99.99932% 1+1 Protection Configuration 71.43x104 1 99.99986%

10.6 Safety Certification


The OptiX OSN 7500 has received several safety certifications. Table 10-47 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received. Table 10-47 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received Item EMC Standard CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A ETSI ES 201 468 CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A Safety IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950-1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 191 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Item Laser safety

Standard FDA rules 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1 IEC60825-2 EN60825-1 EN60825-2 GB7247

Health

ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1

Environment protection

RoHS

10.7 Environmental Conditions


The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a different environment during storage, transportation, and operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions. The following international standards are used as the reference for specifying the environmental conditions:
l l

ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection

10.7.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage. 10.7.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation. 10.7.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.

10.7.1 Environment for Storage


The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage.

Climatic Conditions
Table 10-48 lists the climatic conditions for storage.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 192 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-48 Climatic conditions for storage Item Altitude Air pressure Air temperature Rate of change of temperature Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Movement of surrounding air Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 40 1 to +70 /min

5% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirements
Generally, the equipment on the customer site must be stored indoors. There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment cartons. The equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities. If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l l l l

The cartons must be intact. Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons. There should be no water on the ground where the cartons are placed. The cartons must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.

Biological Conditions
l l

Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus. Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.

Air Cleanness
l l

The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust. The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-49.

Table 10-49 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during storage Mechanically Active Substance Dust (suspension) Dust (sedimentation) Content 5.00 mg/m3 20.0 mg/m2h

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 193 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Mechanically Active Substance Sand

Content 300 mg/m3

The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-50.

Table 10-50 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during storage Chemically Active Substance SO2 H2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress
Table 10-51 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage. Table 10-51 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency dB/oct Range 5 Hz to 20 Hz +12 0.02 m2/s3 10 Hz to 50 Hz 50 Hz to 100 Hz -12

10.7.2 Environment for Transportation


The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation.

Climatic Conditions
Table 10-52 lists the climatic conditions for transportation.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 194 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-52 Climatic conditions for transportation Item Altitude Air pressure Air temperature Rate of change of temperature Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Movement of surrounding air Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 40 to +70

1 /min 5% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirements
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l l l

The cartons must be intact. Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons. There should be no water in the transportation tool.

Biological Conditions
l l

Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus. Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.

Air Cleanness
l l

The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust. The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-53.

Table 10-53 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during transportation Mechanically Active Substance Dust (suspension) Dust (sedimentation) Sand Content No requirement 3.0 mg/m2h 100 mg/m3

The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-54.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 195 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 10-54 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during transportation Chemically Active Substance SO2 H2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 1.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 3.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 0.03 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress
Table 10-55 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during transportation. Table 10-55 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Shock Response spectrum I (sample weight > 50 kg) Response spectrum II (sample weight 50 kg) Fall-off Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Range 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz 3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz

100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each surface 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on each surface < 10 1.0 < 15 1.0 < 20 0.8 < 30 0.6 < 40 0.5 < 50

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 196 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Item

Sub-Item Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m)

Range 0.4 < 100 0.3 > 100 0.1

NOTE The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

10.7.3 Environment for Operation


The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.

Climatic Conditions
Table 10-56 and Table 10-57 list the climatic conditions when the OptiX OSN 7500 operates. Table 10-56 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature Long-term working conditions 0 to 45 Short-term working conditions 5 to +55 Relative Humidity Long-term working conditions 10% to 90% Short-term working conditions 5% to 95%

NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Short-term working conditions mean that the continuous working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and that the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.

Table 10-57 Other climatic conditions Item Altitude Air pressure Rate of change of temperature Solar radiation Heat radiation Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 30 /h 700 W/s2 600 W/s2

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 197 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Item Movement of surrounding air

Range 5 m/s

Biological Conditions
l l

Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus. Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.

Air Cleanness
l l

The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust. The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-58.

Table 10-58 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during operation Mechanically Active Substance Dust particle Dust (suspension) Dust (sedimentation) Sand Content 3 x 105 particles/m 3 0.2 mg/m3 1.5 mg/m2h 20 mg/m3

The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-59.

Table 10-59 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during operation Chemically Active Substance SO2 H2S NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 NOX Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 198 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Mechanical Stress
Table 10-60 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during operation. Table 10-60 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub-Item Velocity Acceleration Frequency range Shock Shock response spectrum II Static load Range 5 mm/s 5 Hz to 62 Hz 2 m/s2 62 Hz to 200 Hz

Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on each surface 0 kPa

NOTE The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board


Different boards have different power consumption and weight. Table 10-61 lists the power consumption and weight of each board. Table 10-61 Power consumption and weight of each board Board Power Consumption (W) Weig ht (kg) Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg)

SDH boards T2SL64 N1SL64 N1SF64 N1SF64A 30 22 23 33 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 T2SL64A N1SLD64 N1SF16 N1SL16A and N2SL16A N1SLQ16 N1SL4A N1SLD4A 40 41 26 20 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.1

N3SL16 N2SLQ16 N1SL16 and N2SL16

22 38 20

1.1 1.3 1.1

21 17 17

0.9 1.0 1.0

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 199 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board

Power Consumption (W) 38 15 15

Weig ht (kg) 1.0 1.0 1.0

Board

Power Consumption (W) 17 17 12

Weight (kg) 1.0 1.0 0.6

N1SLO16 N1SL4 and N2SL4 N1SLD4 and N2SLD4 N1SLQ4 and N2SLQ4 N1SL1 and N2SL1 N1SLQ1 and N2SLQ1 N2SLO1 N3SLO1 N1SLH1

N1SLQ4A N1SL1A N1SLN

16

1.0

N3SLD41

13

0.6

14 15

1.0 1.0

N3SLQ41 N1SLQ1A

14 17

0.6 1.0

26 24 22

1.1 1.2 1.0

N1SLT1 N3SLT1 N1SEP1 and N1SEP N1RPC01 -

15 25 17

1.2 1.3 1.0

N1SLH1A N1RPC02 PDH boards N1PD3 N2PD3 N1PL3 and N1PL3A N2PL3 and N2PL3A N2SPQ4 N1DX1

21 70

1.0 4.2

110 -

4.0 -

19 12 15 12 24 15 (before the tributary protection switching (TPS)); 31 (after the TPS)

1.1 0.9 1.0 0.9 0.9 1.0

N2PQ3 N1PQ1 N2PQ1 N1PQM N1PQMA N1DXA

13 19 13 22 21 10

0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.8

Interface boards and switching and bridging boards N1MU04 2 0.4 N1C34S 0 (before the 0.3

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 200 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board

Weig ht (kg)

Board

Power Consumption (W) TPS); 2 (after the TPS)

Weight (kg)

N1EU08 N1OU08 and N2OU08 N1D34S

11 6

0.4 0.4

N1D12B N1D12S

0 0 (before the TPS); 9 (after the TPS) 0 (before the TPS); 6 (after the TPS) 0 (before the TPS); 8 (after the TPS) 0 (before the TPS); 3 (after the TPS) -

0.3 0.4

0 (before the TPS); 2 (after the TPS) 0 (before the TPS); 5 (after the TPS) 2

0.4

N1D75S

0.4

N1TSB8

0.3

N1DM12

0.5

N1ETF8

0.4

N1ETS8

0.4

N1EFF8 Data boards N1EAS2 N1EFS4 N3EFS4 N1EMS2

0.4

70 30 22 40 (with the electrical interface board); 54 (with the optical interface board) 43 25 29 70

1.2 1.0 1.1 0.8

N1ADL4 N1ADQ1 N1IDL4 N1EMS4

41 41 41 65 (with the electrical interface board); 75 (with the optical interface board) 41 26 15 22

0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1

N2EGS2 N3EGS2 N1EGT2 N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 N4EGS4

1.0 1.0 0.9 1.1

N1IDQ1 N1MST4 N2EGT2 N1EFT8 and N1EFT8A N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 N1EFS0A

1.0 0.9 0.9 1.0

43

0.7

35

1.0

N2EGR2

40

1.1

33 (with the electrical interface board); 44 (with the

1.1

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 201 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Board

Power Consumption (W)

Weig ht (kg)

Board

Power Consumption (W) optical interface board)

Weight (kg)

N2EMR0

50

1.2

N5EFS0

26 (with the electrical interface board); 32 (with the optical interface board)

0.6

Cross-connect boards and system control boards N2GSCC and N3GSCC N4GSCC N5GSCC T1GXCSA 20 0.9 T1SXCSA 96 2.2

19 10 41

1.0 0.9 1.8

T2UXCSA T1IXCSA T1EXCSA

69 140 53

2.1 2.4 1.9

Other boards TN11MR2 TN11MR4 N1MR2A N1MR2C 0.2 0.2 0 0 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 BA2 N1BPA N2BPA 61COA and N1COA 62COA T1AUX N1FANA T1PIU N1RPWR 20 20 11 10 1.0 1.0 1.2 3.5

TN11CMR 2 TN11CMR 4 TN11OBU 1 N1LWX N1IFSD1

0.2 0.2 16 30 27

0.8 0.9 1.3 1.1 1.1

75 3 19 8 45

8 0.4 1.5 1.3 1.4

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 202 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

11
11.1 ITU-T Recommendations
Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations Recommendation G.652 G.655 G.661 G.662 G.663 G.671 G.691 G.692 G.694.1 G.694.2 G.702 G.703 Description

Compliant Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.

Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems with optical amplifiers Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 203 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Recommendation G.704 G.7041 G.7042 G.707 G.709 G.773 G.774 1-5 G.775 G.783 G.784 G.803 G.811 G.812 G.813 G.823 G.824 G.825

Description Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels Generic framing procedure (GFP) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures

G.826

G.831 G.841 G.842

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 204 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Recommendation G.957 G.958 I.121 I.150 I.311 I.321 I.361 I.630 M.3010 Q.811 Q.812 V.24

Description Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables Broadband aspects of ISDN B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics B-ISDN general network aspects B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions B-ISDN ATM layer specification ATM protection switching Principles for a telecommunication management network Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band circuits Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems Ethernet over LAPS

V.35 V.28 X.21

X.86

11.2 IEEE Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IEEE standards. Table 11-2 IEEE standards Standard IEEE 802.17 Description Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 205 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Standard IEEE 802.1ad IEEE 802.1ag IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1q IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3ad IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ah IEEE 802.3u

Description Virtual bridged local area networks Amendment 4: Provider bridges Connectivity fault management Media access control (MAC) bridges Virtual bridged local area networks Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification Aggregation of multiple link segments Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100Base-T Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full duplex operation Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems implemented with technologies

IEEE 802.3x IEEE 802.3z

IEEE 1588

11.3 IETF Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IETF standards. Table 11-3 IETF standards Standard RFC 2615 (1999) RFC 1662 (1994) RFC 1661 (1994) RFC 1990 RFC 2514 Description PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH PPP in HDLC-like Framing The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP) Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 206 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Standard RFC 3031 RFC 3032

Description Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture MPLS Label Stack Encoding

11.4 ANSI Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ANSI related standards. Table 11-4 ANSI related standards Standard ANSI X3.296 ANSI X3.230 Description SBCON (ESCON): FICON Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)

11.5 Environment Related Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the environment related standards. Table 11-5 Environment related standards Standard IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-3-3 IEC 60721-2-6 IEC 60721-3-1 Description Basic environmental testing procedures Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1: Storage Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations Partly temperature-controlled location Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: Physical protection

IEC 60721-3-3

ETS 300 019-1-1 ETS 300 019-1-3 NEBS GR-63-CORE

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 207 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

11.6 EMC Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the EMC related standards. Table 11-6 EMC related standards Standard IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-29 EN 61000-4-29 Description Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques-Surge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement Information technology equipment-immunity charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)

CISPR 22/EN 55022 CISPR 24/EN 55024 ETSI EN 300386

ETSI EN 201468

ETSI EN 300132-2

11.7 Safety Compliance Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 208 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 11-7 Safety compliance related standards Standard EN 60950 IEC 950 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 950-95 73/23/EEC UL 60950-1 IEC 60529 Description Information technology equipment - safety Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment Audio, video and similar electronic equipment Safety of information technology equipment Low voltage directive Safety of information technology equipment Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

11.8 Protection Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the protection related standards. Table 11-8 Protection related standards Standard IEC 61024-1 IEC 61312-1 IEC 61000-4-5 ITU-T K.11 ITU-T K.20 ITU-T K.27 ITU-T K.41 Description Protection of structures against lightning Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general principles Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltages and overcurrents Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication building Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to surge overvoltages

11.9 ASON Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ASON related standards.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 209 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Table 11-9 ASON related standards Standard G.807 G.8080 G.7712 G.7713 G.7714 G.7715 G.7716 G.7717 G.7718 RFC 3471 (GMPLS) Description Requirements for automatic switched transport networks (ASTN) Architecture for the automatically switched optical network (ASON) Architecture and specification of data communication network Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on PNNI Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state protocols Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and recovery Connection admission control Framework for ASON management Signaling functional description

11.10 Microwave Standards


The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the microwave related standards. Table 11-10 Microwave related standards Standard ITU-R F.384-7 Description Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the upper 6 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity radio-relay systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems operating in the 7 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the 8 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 11 GHz band

ITU-R F.383-6 ITU-R F.385-8 ITU-R F.386-6

ITU-R F.387-9

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 210 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Standard ITU-R F.497-6 ITU-R F.636-3 ITU-R F.595-8 ITU-R F.637-3 ITU-R F.748-3 ITU-R F.749-2 ITU-R F.1191-1 1 ITU-R SM.329-10 ETSI EN 302 217-1 V1.1.4 ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.1.3

Description Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 13 GHz frequency band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 15 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems operating in the 18 GHz frequency band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 23 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 25, 26 and 28 GHz bands Radio-frequency arrangements for systems of the fixed service operating in the 38 GHz band Bandwidths and unwanted emissions of digital radio-relay systems Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 1: Overview and system-independent common characteristics Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-1: System-dependent requirements for digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 3: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for equipment operating in frequency bands where no frequency co-ordination is applied Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-1: System-dependent requirements for antennas Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for antennas

ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3

ETSI EN 302 217-3 V1.1.3

ETSI EN 302 217-4-1 V1.1.3 ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 V1.2.1

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 211 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Standard ETSI EN 301 126-1 V1.1.2 ETSI EN 301 126-3-1 V1.1.2 ETSI EN 301 390 V1.2.1 iec 60153-2-1974 iec 60154-2-1980

Description Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 1: Point-to-Point equipment - Definitions, general requirements and test procedures Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 3-1: Point-to-Point antennas; Definitions, general requirements and test procedures Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point and Multipoint Systems; Spurious emissions and receiver immunity limits atequipment/antenna port of Digital Fixed Radio Systems Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for ordinary rectangular waveguides Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for flanges for ordinary rectangular waveguides

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 212 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

12
This chapter lists the glossary used in this manual. 1+1 protection 1:N protection 10BASE-T

Glossary

A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal. 10Base-T is a transmission medium specified by IEEE 802.3i that carries information at rates up to 10Mbps in baseband form using unshielded twisted pair (UTP) conductors with low cost Level 3 or better UTP wiring up to 100 meters (328 ft.). 10BaseT uses RJ45 connectors and sometimes 50-pin AMP connectors to a patch panel. IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network. IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire. Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.

100BASE-T 100Base-TX

3R

A ADM A communications device that multiplexes (combines) several signals for transmission over a single medium. A demultiplexor completes the process by separating multiplexed signals from a transmission line.Frequently a multiplexor and demultiplexor are combined into a single device capable of processing both outgoing and incoming signals. A means of alerting the operator that a specified abnormal condition exists.

Alarm

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 213 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

ALS

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a high-performance, cell-oriented switching and multiplexing technology that utilizes fixed-length packets to carry different types of traffic. ATM is a technology that will enable carriers to capitalize on a number of revenue opportunities through multiple ATM classes of services; high-speed local-area network (LAN) interconnection; voice, video, and future multimedia applications in business markets in the short term; and in community and residential markets in the longer term..

ATM

B Bandwidth The range of frequencies a circuit will respond to or pass through. It may also be the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies of a signal.

C Concatenation The process of summing the bandwidth of a number of smaller containers into a larger bandwidth container. Two versions exist: contiguous concatenation and virtual concatenation. The control plane performs the call control and connection control functions. Through signalling, the control plane sets up and releases connections, and may restore a connection in case of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in support of call and connection control, such as routing information dissemination. Characteristics of a service such as described by service identity, virtual network, link capability requirements, QoS and traffic threshold parameters.

Control plane

CoS

D DNI DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario.

E Encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols in which a layer adds header information to the protocol data unit (PDU) from the layer above. As an example, in Internet terminology, a packet would contain a header from the physical layer, followed by a header from the network layer (IP), followed by a header from the transport layer (TCP), followed by the application protocol data.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 214 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

EPL

A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. The IEEE 802.3 standard for contention networks. Ethernet uses a bus or star topology and relies on the form of access known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) to regulate communication line traffic. Network nodes are linked by coaxial cable, by fiber-optic cable, or by twisted-pair wiring. Data is transmitted in variable-length frames containing delivery and control information and up to 1,500 bytes of data. The Ethernet standard provides for baseband transmission at 10 megabits (10 million bits) per second and is available in various forms, including those known as Thin Ethernet, Thick Ethernet, 10Base2, 10Base5, 10BaseF, and 10BaseT. The IEEE standard dubbed 802.3z, or Gigabit Ethernet, operates at 10 times 100 Mbps speed. ETSI standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM. A service that is both a line service and a virtual private service. The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.

Ethernet

ETSI EVPL Extra traffic

F Fairness algorithm FEC To ensure that all the stations can share the bandwidth fairly in the event of congestion or overload, RPR presents a special fair algorithm for fair bandwidth sharing and allocation. forward error correction (FEC) is a system of error control for data transmission, whereby the sender adds redundant data to its messages, which allows the receiver to detect and correct errors (within some bound) without the need to ask the sender for additional data. The advantage of forward error correction is that retransmission of data can often be avoided, at the cost of higher bandwidth requirements on average, and is therefore applied in situations where retransmissions are relatively costly or impossible. Fiber that is used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. An action when the network operator forces the network to use the protection resources instead of the working resources, or vice-versa, regardless of the state of the resources. In data transmission, the sequence of contiguous bits delimited by, and including, beginning and ending flag sequences.

Fiber jumper

Forced switch

Frame

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 215 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

I IMA Short for inverse multiplexing over ATM. IMA is a physical layer technology in which a high-speed stream of ATM cells is broken up and transmitted across multiple T1/E1 links, then is reconstructed back into the original ATM cell order at the destination. IMA is first standardized (v1.0) by the ATM Forum in1997, and updated (v1.1) in 1999. IMA group refers to physical links grouped to form a higher-bandwidth logical link, whose rate is approximately the sum of the individual link rates. An Intelligent Network service is a sophisticated telecommunication service. Its creation and its operation are facilitated by telecommunication network architecture, based on Intelligent Network (IN) concept.

IMA group

Intelligent Network Service

J Jitter The variation in the time taken for packets to be delivered to an endpoint or network entity.

L Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.

M Manual Switching When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability. A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into Virtual Containers at the boundary of an SDH network. The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.

Map MSP

Multiplexer

O ODU The ODU is the outdoor part of the OptiX RTN 600 system. It performs frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 216 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Optical Amplifier Orderwire

Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in an suitable active medium. Orderwire is able to provide voice communication for operators or maintenance engineers at different workstation.

P Paired slots A pair of slots whose overhead can be processed by the bus on the backplane. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the cross-connect board.

R Ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals. Resilient packet ring (RPR) technology is optimized for robust and efficient packet networking over a fiber ring topology. It has resilient mechanisms such as dynamic bandwidth allocation through fairness algorithm, space multiplexing, and wrap protection. RPR nodes are connected in a ring topology by two fibers, each transmitting in the opposite direction. RPR networks delivers data, voice, and video services through packets.

RPR

S SNCP A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. The contract between a service provider and the customer that specifies the level of service that will be provided.

SLA

T TCM A method used to monitor bit errors. If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the bit errors of each section can be monitored through TCM. A suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones being TCP and IP. Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect. In the optical transmission system, tributary protection switching (TPS) refers to the protection switching of tributary signals.

TCP/IP

Timeslot TPS

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 217 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

Transport plane The transport plane provides bidirectional or unidirectional transfer of user information, from one location to another. It can also provide transfer of some control and network management information. The transport plane is layered; it is equivalent to the transport network defined in ITU-T Rec. G.805.

V VC Virtual concatenation is the primary enhancement to voice optimized SONET, in order to support the transport of variable bit data streams.

W WTR A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from.

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 218 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

13
A ABR ADM AMI APS ASON ATM ATPC B BITS BPA C CAR CBR CC CF CMI CR-LDP CSPF D DCC DCE DDN

Acronyms and Abbreviations

This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.

Available Bit Rate Add/Drop Multiplexer Alternate Mark Inversion Automatic Protection Switching Automatically Switched Optical Network Asynchronous Transfer Mode Automatic Transmit Power Control

Building Integrated Timing Supply System Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit

Committed Access Rate Constant Bit Rate Continuity Check Compact Flash Coded Mark Inversion Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol Constrained Shortest Path First

Data Communication Channels Data Circuit-terminal Equipment Digital Data Network

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 219 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

DVB-ASI DWDM E ECC EMC EPL EPLAN ESCON ETS ETSI EVPL EVPLAN F FC FE FEC FICON FPGA G GE GFP GMPLS H HDB3 HDLC I IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IMA

Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Embedded Control Channel Electromagnetic Compatibility Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Enterprise Systems Connection European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute Ethernet Virtual Private Line Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

Fiber Channel Fast Ethernet Forward Error Correction Fiber Connection Field Programmable Gate Array

Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure General Multiprotocol Label Switching

High Density Bipolar of order 3 code High level Data Link Control

International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Engineering Task Force Intermediate Frequency Internet Group Management Protocol Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 220 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

ITU-T L LACP LAN LAPS LB LCAS LCT LPT LSP M MAC MADM MCF MLM MPLS MSP N NEBS nrt-VBR NS NSF O OADM OAM OAM&P ODU OSP OTM P PDH PE

International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Local Area Network; Local Area Network Link Access Procedure-SDH Loopback Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Local Craft Terminal Link State Path Through Label Switch Path

Media Access Control Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer Message Communication Function Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Protection

Network Equipment-Building System Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate Network Side Non-interrupted Service Forwarding

Optical Add/drop Multiplexer Operation, Administration and Maintenance Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision Outdoor Unit OptiX Software Platform Optical Terminal Multiplexer

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Provider Edge

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 221 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

PPP Q QoS R RPR RSTP rt-VBR RSVP-TE S SDH SFP SLA SLM SNCP SNCMP SNCTP STP T TCM TPS U UBR UPM V VC VCC VLAN VP VPC VPN W WDM

Point-to-Point Protocol

Quality of Service

Resilient Packet Ring Rapid Span Tree Protocol Real Time Variable Bite rate Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Small Form Pluggable Service Level Agreement Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Subnetwork Connection Protection Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection Spanning Tree Protocol

Tandem Connection Monitoring Tributary Protection Switching

Unspecified Bit Rate Uninterrupted Power Modules

Virtual Channel Virtual Channel Connection Virtual Local Area Network Virtual Path Virtual Path Connection Virtual Private Network

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 222 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009 Product Description

WTR

Wait-to-Restore

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

Commercial in Confidence

Page 223 of 223

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen